Home

Anritsu ML2430A User's Manual

1. CHARGING mA h nickel metal hydride Ni MH multi cell pack located in a compart REMOVAL AND ment on the bottom of the housing The compartment cover is secured by REPLACEMENT fractional turn fasteners as shown in Figure 2 1 Rotate the fasteners ap proximately 14 turn counterclockwise to release the cover NOTE ML2430A BATTERY BATTERY COVER i i q M OPEN S OPEN O O o i i O o E BATTERY COVER FASTENERS NOTE Do not lubricate the battery cover fasteners Figure 2 1 Model ML2430A Series Battery Compartment ML2430A OM The battery is shipped with a partial charge only and should be fully charged before use The battery can be completely charged in about two hours with the power meter in standby mode by selecting CHARGE from the System menu page 4 30 This selection is available only when the instrument is being powered by AC line power or external DC power greater than 21 volts Note that the instrument will shut down during the charging cycle and re start automatically when the charging is completed A series of 10 beeps signals completion of the charge cycle The external battery charger option ML2400A 13 can completely charge the battery in 2 5 hours 2 9 CAUTION e To avoid excessive heat build up always remove the ML2430A from the optional soft sided carrying case D41310 before selecting fast charging CAUTION e The ML2430A battery pac
2. float bin_data ival 1024 0 count 6 reall entries loop real2 entries loop ML2430A OM 6 135 A 1 NTRODUCTION A 2 system SPECIFICATIONS ML2430A OM Appendix A Specifications This appendix provides system specifications for the ML2430A Series Power Meters along with listings of system defaults and error messages This section provides overall system specifications Frequency Range Power Sensors Sensor Dynamic Range Power Measurement Range Voltage Meas urement Range Display Range Display Reso lution Offset Range Display Units 10 MHz to 90 GHz sensor dependent Meter specifications apply to MA2400A Series Power Sensors Compatible with MA and MP Series sensors MA2420A B Series Fast Thermal Sensors 50 dB MA2440A Series High Accuracy Power Sensors 87 dB CW MA2470A Series Power Sensors 90 dB CW MA2460A B Series Fast diode sensors 80dB MA2480A Series Universal Power Sensor 80 dB 70 to 47 dBm 0 1 nW to 50W sensor attenuator dependent Use couplers for higher power levels 0 00 to 20 00 V nominal 99 999 to 99 999 dB Selectable from 0 1 dB to 0 001 dB limited to 0 01 dB in graphical display modes Linear power units 3 to 6 digit 1 3 digits selectable to right of decimal nW W Voltage 1 2 digits selectable to right of decimal 99 99 to 99 99 dB Fixed value or frequency de pendent table dBm dB dBr dBmV dBuV W V
3. Ask for 10 readings for i O i lt 10 i 5 21 OPTIMIZING READINGS PROCEDURES Send 0 13 O 1 3L NLend Receive 0 13 buffer i 20 STOPend Settling Power Level dBm Readings Second 0 1 160 0 1 160 10 0 160 The 0 1 settling on 30 dBm power level results were not improved because of the amount of time needed to settle to 0 1 on 30 dBm FAST Using the FAST command page 6 37 limits the types of measurements that can ON OFF be taken As some processes are turned off higher measurement speeds can be command achieved FAST will not operate when sent via RS232 When THE FAST ON command is selected the readout display is also turned OFF NOTE Using FAST mode only increases speed when asking for one measurement at a time using the Receive command C code example send fast mode ON Send 0 13 FAST ON 7L NLend Setup the power meter into talk addressed In this mode we can read from power meter without readdressing each time i Receivesetup 0 13 Now read 10 readings for loop 0 loop lt 10 loop RevRespMsg 0 buffer STOPend Settling Power Level dBm Readings Second 0 1 150 0 1 150 10 0 610 10 0 30 250 The 0 1 settling on 30 dBm power level results were not improved because of the time needed to settle to 0 1 at 30 dBm 5 22 ML2430A OM PROCEDURES Using Buffered Requests Changing measure
4. RDB DBV50 DBV75 VLT50 amp VLT75 In some cases there are differences between the ML2430A in emulation mode and the actual meter being emulated These differences are presented in the fol lowing sections The time taken for an ML2430 to complete the ZEROing sequence for a sensor differs from the time taken by the emulated power meters Any GPIB control pro grams that ZERO the power meter will have no problems with this time difference if the defined ZEROing controls and or sequences for the device being emulated are followed a The HP 436 uses the Z1T AUTO ZERO sequence described in the HP 436 manual a The HP 437 and HP 438 use bit 1 of the status byte to indicate ZERO or CAL completion O The ML4803 uses bit O of the status byte to indicate that the ZERO sequence is not complete The sensor operating ranges for the ML2430 power meters are different from those of the meters being emulated Refer to the specific range information for range commands in each emulation section In the HP 437 and HP 438 the format of the readings agrees with the format specified in the manuals which may differ from the output from some HP437 and HP 438 s For example 14 236 may be output by the HP437 or HP 438 as 14 236e00 or 1 4236e 01 The ML2430A in HP 437 or HP 438 emulation modes will output as the manual specifies 1 4236e 01 6 53 ML2430A OM ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 712 mL4803A 6 54 EM
5. AN EXAMPLE PROGRAM IN C include lt stdio h gt include the NI 488 2 GPIB include file include DECL H LINK with MCIB LIB Compiled with BorlandC 2 0 void main int i char buffer 10 20 clear buffer memset buffer 0 200 SendlFC 0 if ibsta amp ERR printf GPIB error nibsta Ox niberr inin ibsta iberr exit 1 Setup ML2430A at address 13 FAST mode output readout channel 1 Send 0 13 RST FAST ON 13L NLend Loop 10 times and store readings for i O i lt 10 i Receive 0 13 buffer i 20 STOPend display readings for i O i lt 10 i printf Reading i s i 1 buffer i 5 16 OPERATOR The ML2430A Series does not require any operator maintenance All re MAINTENANCE pairs must be performed by qualified service personnel only Refer to Ta ble 2 1 for the nearest Anritsu Service Center 5 24 ML2430A OM Chapter 6 GPIB Operation 6 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides alphabetically ordered listings and descriptions of all ML2430A Series GPIB programming commands The majority of the GPIB com mands have equivalents in the front panel menu settings Note that GPIB opera tion is not available when the power meter is running from the internal battery option ML2400A 11 The ML2430A Series Power Meter supports the IEEE 488 2 1992 GPIB standard in ML24XXA native mode HP emulation com mands are not
6. GRYB GRAUTO C 10 PwrVsTime if system setup mode Power vs Time CHANNEL 112 DATA HOLD representation Normal average min amp max min max Data display TIME 1 min to 24 hours Source Sweep if system setup mode Source Sweep CHANNEL 112 DATA HOLD representation Normal min amp max min max Source sweep MODE Frequency power Sweep START frequency or power 10 kHz to 122 GHz 120 00 dB to 30 00 dB Sweep STOP frequency or power 10 kHz to 122 GHz 120 00 dB to 30 00 dB Control if system setup mode Profile Power vs Time or Source Sweep SWAP CURSOR LEFT CURSOR RIGHT SCALE TOP 150 00 dB to 250 000B y Units are dBmV or dBuV if BOTTOM display channel units are dBmV or dBuV respectively 150 00 dB to 250 00 dB AUTOSCALE ML2430A OM APPENDIX C GRDATA GRDRQ GPRST CURLK HOLD GRAUTO DBLGHT DCONTD DCONT DCONTU DCONT DBLTIM DPEAK FROFF TEXT TEXTS KEYCK ENTERR FBEEP FBEEP PRINT ML2430A OM SYSTEM MENU READOUT CLEAR LINK CURSOR Graph HOLD AUTO scale Battery BACKLIGHT On timed off Set display contrast DOWN 1 to 10 Set display contrast UP 1 to 10 TIMED only if BACKLIGHT TIMED 1 to 100 minutes PEAKMETER display Off sensor A sensor B sensor A amp B FREQuency offset display On off GPIB user TEXT display On off KEY click state On off Beep on EDIT er
7. PROCEDURES 5 15 opTIMIZING READINGS DISP ON OFF command ML2430A OM OPTIMIZING READINGS This section presents information on how to get the fastest readings from the ML2430A Series power meter when operating under GPIB control Refer to Chapter 6 GPIB Operation for specific command descriptions Measurement speed depends greatly on the type of measurements being taken the power level and the amount of settling used NOTES All results shown in this section are from DOS programs running on a 200 MHz controller using IEEE 488 2 GPIB function calls The timings readings second presented in this section are for illustrative purposes only Using the default system set up system preset the O 1 page 6 57 command is used to retrieve one reading from channel 1 ten times channel 1 Sensor A C code example Reset the unit Send 0 13 RST 4L NLend Ask for 10 readings for i O i lt 10 i Send 0 13 O 1 3L NLend Receive 0 13 buffer i 20 STOPend Settling Power Level dBm Readings Second 0 1 150 0 1 150 10 0 150 There are however methods of improving the speed of the measurement without having to change the power level or settling time Using the DISP command page 6 33 the readout display can be turned OFF yet data can still be acquired from the readout channels C code example turn display off Send 0 13 DISP OFF 8L NLend
8. Remarks 6 100 ESE lt val gt 8 bit mask Event registers for the HP 437B see Figure 6 8 Bit 7 Power ON Bit 6 N A Bit 5 Command error Bit 4 Execution error Bit 3 Device Dependent error Bit 2 N A Bit 1 N A Bit O N A See the HP 437B manual for details about the HP status registers ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS Standard Qo Device Dependent Error QU1 Command Error gt Execution Error AA 11 2 J Power On Logical OR 211 O Event Status Register ESR Queue not empty A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESESNRP Output Queue Standard Event Status Enable Register 7 lt q read by Serial Poll Service BGS l Request 7 6 Jess may 3 2 1 0 Status Byte Register Generation MSS lt q read by STB o O 4 A S Y O Y 2 E AS 1 Service Request Enable Register 7D5J4 3T2T1o Sono Figure 6 8 IEEE 488 2 Standard Status Structures ESE Return Event status register enable mask Syntax ESE Remarks Returned format lt unsigned character gt When converted to an 8 bit binary number this byte yields the bit settings of the register ESR Event status register request Syntax ESR Remarks Return the value of the standard event status register Afterwards the event ML2430A OM status register ar
9. Sensor B is required for the current measurement but is not fitted as per message Try selecting print when current job finished Printer reporting Out of paper Printer communication error Waiting for trigger on specified channel for more than 6 seconds WARNING In profile mode when using manual or continuous trigger the data col lection period must be gt 6 ms warning message Programming SENSOR EEPROM In any graph mode the selected display channel is off as per message Attempt to read write sensor B setup on ML2437A Cal factor out of range sensor A Cal factor out of range sensor B Present configuration will not allow re quested change Entered numeric value out of range Requested action NOT allowed Cal factor edit duplicate frequency entered Cannot delete last cal factor data pair in se lected table or cannot add cal factor data pair in selected table Cannot delete 50 MHz cal factor in selected table Non valid cal factor table ML2430A OM Appendix B GPIB Quick Reference B 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix contains quick reference tables for all supported com mands Native mode commands are sorted by functional group For de tailed command explanations refer to the page references listed B 2 ML24XXA QUICK The following tables reference ML24XXA native mode commands A REFERENCE command followed by a indicates that there is an equivalent query command for that function
10. Set single sensor B display Syntax BP Remarks Display Input B readings Set display B A Syntax BR Remarks Display the Input B reading divided by the Input A reading Cal Adjust Syntax CL lt val gt lt terminator gt val 50 0 to 120 0 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION CS DA DD DE ML2430A OM terminator Remarks Examples HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS Yo PCT EN Same as the ML24XXA native CFADJ command Sets a calibration factor to be used when performing a O dBm calibration CL98 5EN CL98 5 CL98 5PCT Clear all status bytes Syntax Remarks Display All Syntax Remarks Display disable Syntax Remarks Related Commands Display enable Syntax Remarks CS Same as the CLS command Resets all of the GPIB status registers and clears the input queue DA Turns on all the segments of the display to verify proper operation The dis play is returned to normal when another command is sent DD Turns the display off to allow faster measurements to be taken DE DE Return the display to normal operation after the display has been set in DD mode 6 119 HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Related Commands DD DR Set GPIB address Syntax DR lt val gt val 1 to 30 Remarks Changes the device address when operating in HP emulation mode The power meter default address is 13 EMUL GPIB emulation mode Syntax EMUL lt mode gt
11. A in the displayed sta tus box by the Cal Fac tor indicator signifies User Cal Factors are active User Cal Factors are maintained in the sen sor ML2430A OM USER CAL FACTORS The data can be displayed as a maximum value only a minimum value only max imum and minimum values the average of all the readings during the time slot period or the latest measured value These display modes are selected in the SYSTEM PwrVsTime menu DATA HOLD representation Measurement setup i e trigger etc is selected the same way as in Readout mode The minimum sweep time is 1 minute and the maximum sweep time is 24 hours All MA24XXA Power Sensors have an internal EEPROM containing correction and calibration factors programmed into the sensor at the factory This cal factor data is used when the power meter is set up to use frequency or volts per GHz calibration factors The correction is in linearity across the dynamic range and sensitivity across frequency The ML2430A Series has the capability to define sets of calibration factor data and store them in the sensor A user defined cal factor table can be used on its own or in conjunction with the factory defined cal factor table Linearity correction is not affected provided the meter cal factor frequency is set correctly Depending on the amount of factory calibration data stored in the sensor there can be up to 10 user defined cal factor tables A user cal factor t
12. GPIB OPERATION 07 to 150 31 55 to 1 76dB If the Cal factor source is set to manual this is the calibration factor number used CFCAL A 99 Sets the calibration factor to 99 for sensor A CFCAL A DB 0 2 Sets the calibration factor to 2 dB for sensor A CFCAL lt S gt CFCAL lt s gt lt units gt lt val gt CFFRO lt s gt lt value gt units AorB 10 kHz to 122 GHz Sets the frequency used to look up the correction data from the sensor s internal table Both of the following examples set the frequency for cal source frequency to 25 GHz for sensor A CFFRQ A 25E9 CFFRQ A 25GHZ CFFRO lt s gt CFFRQ lt s gt lt value gt CFSRC lt S gt lt Source gt AorB FREQ MAN VGHZ Sets the source of the calibration factor Frequency uses the internal EE PROM calibration factor value in the sensor from the frequency set by the CFFRQ number Frequencies between Cal Factor data points are interpo lated linearly to 0 01 dB resolution ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Manual uses the CFCAL number itself VGHz takes the frequency from the V GHz input and uses it to look up the calibration factor from the EEPROM in the sensor Related Commands CFVAL Query CFSRC lt s gt Returned String CFSRC lt s gt lt source gt CFUADD Add an entry pair to a cal factor table SENSOR Syntax CFUADD lt s gt lt table number gt lt frequency value gt units lt cal fac
13. 6 83 ML4803 Emulation 6 85 6 95 AE ae Gwe RA EE 6 4 B 6 CONNECT s e as soa a vienes nha oe 4 33 5 16 Connections uc aooaa a a E BES E 3 1 connectors front panel 2 035 a a a 3 1 rearpanel 3 2 3 4 4 29 Contrast sm Obese eRe e eee a eae A 4 27 Control 6 eee nee ye DR a 4 24 cover front panel 1 2 CUTSON amp a8 esse 4 2 4 10 4 17 4 26 5 11 D DATA HOLD 4 22 4 23 5 11 Dis a Nes sas sas pen ES 2 2 3 3 defaults ee A 6 UCA e s 20 pus Des assess 4 30 DELAY 4 17 4 21 device Clear 5 6 6 6 device trigger 2 ee eee ee 6 6 DSP oz or eeSaeeea Be te 4 26 6 10 DOP a eta wee a a cee tee see 4 3 Duty Cycle o 4 11 E EDGE sapos sos ads de 4 17 EDIT o across ss a e E 4 8 EEPROM lt 22260 pavas 4 6 emulation 4 29 6 1 6 96 6 97 6 101 6 118 environmental requirements 2 3 2 10 error code 2 5 4 A 11 error messages aoaaa aa A 11 A 12 Event Status Register 6 7 externalDC 3 3 F FACTOR 22442544243 44542 425 2 4 8 FAIL HOLD 4 14 FAST peera sgen a 4 21 PREG u eaa RR E 4 7 4 27 front panel Index 1 CONOIS lt eos cda 4 1 4 2 operation e reses 4 1 functional group 6 10 B 1 MMS eses PEDE he E a 2 2 2 3 G gate width 4 17 4 24
14. Ensure the power meter is pro grammed with the fre quency of the signal being measured NOTE Manual Cal Factor method only dB CFUNITS EDIT CFUADD CFUSAV CFUCT CFUPT CFULD CFURD CFUID FACTOR CFCAL CAL ADJUST CFADJ OPERATION Factory Selects the Factory calibration factor table Pressing Factory and the key on the numeric keypad allows selection of a user defined table in addition to the factory table This allows full factory calibration to be active and allows adjustments or corrections to be entered in the user defined table If user table 1 was selected the menu would show Factory 1 and the Status box on the readout display would show a warning sign on the Cal Factor line bottom text line in the box to show that non standard calibration is being applied CAL F or CAL V Enter Confirms the selection Toggles the Current Cal factor display format from percentage to dB and back Edit any of the available user calibration factor tables in the sensor Options available are CLEAR or PRESET the table enter a new ta ble identity string change or delete existing frequency cal factor data pairs or enter new frequency cal factor data pairs All fre quency cal factor data pairs can have both frequency and calibra tion factor value modified except for the data pair at 50 MHz which can only have its cal factor value changed All frequency cal factor data pairs can be de
15. Enter new values so that the measured power signal is visible The TOP value must always be higher than the BOTTOM value 3 When finished press another soft key or CLR to return to the display To display the CURSOR READOUT box on the screen press SYSTEM CONTROL more READOUT see page 4 25 This is a toggle action and will display or remove the cursor data readout box from the display The readout shows a digital representation of data at the two cursor positions on the currently displayed channel along with the differences in power A p and time A t The value of A p represents the selected cursor reading minus the other cursor reading and A t represents the time difference between the two cur sors If SENSOR AVERAGING between CURSOR averaging is on the average reading between the cursors is displayed at the bottom of the readout NOTE If continuous trigger is selected or the display is changing while trying to read the readout select TRIGGER MAN UAL to stop the display update The readouts are updated whenever the signal trace is updated or if the cursors are moved It is possible to link the movement of the cursors so they move at the same time This is useful if measurements need to be taken at specific times between the cursors as with channeled signals To link the cursors select SYSTEM CON TROL more more LINK CURSR When the cursors are linked a line is drawn on the display connecting the two cursors and they will
16. Remarks Sets the number of retrys after a failure to connect The delay between retrys is set using MODDEL See Section 5 10 for more information on mo dem operation Query MODRED Returned String MODRED lt count gt MODRNG _ Autodial enable for range error SYSTEM Syntax MODRNG lt state gt value TRUE or FALSE Remarks When set to TRUE produces an SRQ and autodials the phone number set with MODPH when a sensor range error occurs See Section 5 10 for more information on modem operation Query MODRNG Returned String MODRNG lt state gt MXGDB Output Max Graph Binary Data DATA OUTPUT Syntax MXGDB Remarks Available in graph modes only Outputs in binary form the max graph data to the GPIB in the long integer form of 1024 bits per dB as a definite length arbitrary block response data The C programming example Binary output decoding on page 6 133 shows how to extract the binary data The re sponse form is as follows MXGDB lt gt lt length gt lt number_of_bytes gt lt data_byte_1 gt lt data_byte_2 gt lt data_byte_n gt lt n gt lt length gt number of ASCII characters that make up the number_of_bytes value lt number_of_bytes gt number of bytes of data contained in rest of the string lt data_byte_n gt four of these values make up the long integer For example FF FF D1 64 11932 As it is based on 1024 per dB divide by 1024 to get the dB value 11 652 MXGD Output Max Graph Data
17. Remarks The ML2430A Series generates the OPC event in the standard event status register when all pending operations have finished An operation is complete when all input messages before the command have been completed and any responses have been read out of the output buffer Example RGHA 1 RGH B 3 OPC Will set the Operations Complete bit in the Event Status Register once the Range Hold commands have completed OPC Operations complete Output 1 GPIB 488 2 Syntax OPC 6 14 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks Places a single ASCII character 1 on the GPIB output queue when the conditions for the OPC command are met An operation is complete when all input messages before the command have been completed and any responses have been read out of the output buffer Example RGH A 1 RGH B 2 OPC Returns a 1 on the GPIB output when it has finished setting the range hold commands RCL Recall a stored setup SYSTEM Syntax RCL lt val gt val 1to10 Remarks The ML2430A Series can store up to 10 instrument configurations for con venient recall The configuration parameters stored are Sensor Setup Channel Setup and Trigger Setup This command sets the ML2430A Series to a configuration previously stored in memory locations 1 through 10 Trying to recall a setup that has not been saved will set the execution bit in the event register EXE in ESR Related Commands SAV RST
18. TRGXTTL GTXTTL Trigger EDGE if source EXT TTL Rise fall Trig 1 if trig chan 1 manual Trig 2 if trig chan 2 manual Trig 1 amp 2 if trig chan 1 amp 2 manual C 8 ML2430A OM APPENDIX C C 5 SYSTEM MENU System Setup OPMD SAV SYSLD SYSRD SYSLNM SAV SYSLD SYSRD SYSLNM LINK FRST FRST Profile GRMD GRPRD DTRGD GRPIX ML2430A OM SYSTEM MENU The System menus control the operating modes display visibility sound rear panel functions and battery state of the ML2430A Series Power Meter Note that the soft keys will appear differently depending upon the operation mode selected with the Setup soft key MODE Readout profile power vs time source sweep SAVE instrument setup Enter setup number 1 to 10 LIST SCROLL RECALL instrument setup Enter setup number 1 to 10 LIST SCROLL only if stores available for RECALL only if stores available for RECALL LINK readout profile trigger On off FAST system recall mode PRESET to default setup RESET FACTORY CANCEL if system setup mode Profile CHANNEL FE Data collection PERIOD 100ns to 7 seconds Display trigger DELAY 0 to 7 seconds DATA HOLD representation Normal min amp max min max C 9 SYSTEM MENU APPENDIX C GRMD GRPIX GRDDT GRMD GRPIX SRCMOD ISRCSTFRQ SRCSTPWR ISRCSPFRQ SRCSPPWR CUR CUR GRAUTO GRYT
19. The Mod Average sensor mode is unnecessary for thermal power sensors The Custom sensor mode permits the highest measurement rates Trigger controls are available with this sensor mode Trigger Delay the time between the ML2430A Series receipt of a valid trigger event and the start of sample integration and Gate Width the du ration of sample integration controls are located in the Trigger menus When using universal power sensors only default mode is avail able unless OPTION is set to Fast CW Fast CW can only be se lected for sensors supplied with option 01 SENSOR MENU OPERATION NOTE o HOLD Allows the operating range of the selected sensor to be set to the The HOLD selection is RGH desired range Select a Range Hold value of 1 to 5 or Auto When not avallable when in Auto the range changes to take the best measurement automati System Setup mode is cally Auto is the default setting following system preset set to Source Sweep In this mode AUTO Typical Range Hold values for diode sensors are ranging is used Range 1 above approximately 12 dBm Range 2 10 to 27 dBm Range 3 25 to 42 dBm Range 4 40 to 57 dBm Range 5 below 55 dBm SETTLE Settle per reading is available when the sensor mode is set to NOTE SENSTL Default The settling time allows some control over the tradeoff be tween speed and the extent to which a measurement has settled to SETTLE affects its final value A 1 settling value r
20. To display a CW signal again re select CONTINUOUS trigger in TRIG GER SETUP MODE In some conditions it is useful to view triggered signals independent of signal levels In these cases provide an external trigger source into the rear panel TRIGGER input to trigger such a measurement 3 The dynamic range in PROFILE mode should extend to the maximum specifi cation of the meter to approximately 40 dBm diode sensors only If the dis played range is restricted check that RANGE HOLD is not applied NOTE lf RANGE HOLD 1 is applied the lower limit will be ap proximately 30 dBm If RANGE HOLD 2 is applied the maximum level will be limited to approximately 10 dBm In most triggered situations range hold should be set to AUTO 5 13 PROFILE OPERATION MODE PROCEDURES Control of x axis Width of Profile Sample Time 5 14 The unique method of range changing applied in this mode means that the change between range 1 and 2 is effected in less than 2 us In most cases it is not notice able although there may be a slight discontinuity Due to the range change method if a triggered signal is not repetitive the range change may not settle instantly and the displayed result may be in error This is generally true for x axis times of less than 6 ms where it takes more than one pass to completely update the display The control of the time frames over which the PROFILE is gathered is very pre cise but there are cer
21. checks for the reading to rise above 10 even though the display units type has been changed LLIMS LLIM lt a gt String LLIM lt c gt lt val gt Turn on off low limits Syntax LLIMS lt c gt lt state gt c 1or2 state ON or OFF ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks The LLIMS command turns the limits on and off Related Commands LLIM Query LLIMS lt c gt Returned String LLIMS lt c gt lt state gt MMRST Min Max Tracking reset CHANNEL Syntax MMRST lt c gt c 1or2 Remarks This command resets the min max values when in Readout or Power vs Time mode In profile mode this command is used to reset the channels min max values MNGDB Output Min Graph Binary Data DATA OUTPUT Syntax MNGDB Remarks Available in graph modes only Outputs in binary form the min graph data to the GPIB in the long integer form of 1024 bits per dB as a definite length arbitrary block response data The C programming example Binary output decoding on page 6 133 shows how to extract the binary data The re sponse form is as follows MNGDB lt gt lt length gt lt number_of_bytes gt lt data_byte_1 gt lt data_byte_2 gt lt data_byte_n gt lt n gt lt length gt number of ASCII characters make up the number_of_bytes value lt number_of_bytes gt number of bytes of data contained in rest of the string lt data_byte_n gt four of these values makes up the long integer For
22. erence point x indicates the active trigger point after the DELAY setting in the System Profile menu Providing sufficient delay has been set the PRE TRG can be used to move this reference to anywhere on the screen The amount of valid data displayed before the trigger reference point is dependent on the System Pro file DELAY setting Also see Figure 4 4 page 4 20 Normally OFF When the system is powered on the ML2430A Series returns to the state it was in when it was powered off This includes all the offset tables cali bration adjust values etc lf Secure is set to Clear memory non volatile memory is disabled and all stored values are reset to the factory defaults when the system is powered on As long as this selection is set to Clear memory the system will load the presets See Ap pendix A Section A 3 every time it is turned on This selection will display the installed firmware version the instrument serial number and the instrument type model number The Cal Zero menu establishes the 0 0 dBm reference calibration and zeroing of the sensors Refer to Chapter 5 for specific procedures This function zeros and then sets the 50 MHz 0 0 dBm reference of the con nected sensor In dual sensor systems with both sensors connected sensor A or B must be selected References the connected sensor to 0 0 dBm at 50 MHz In dual sensor systems with both sensors connected sensor A or B must be selected Zeros the connected se
23. lt mem gt to 0 0 dBm Clears the offset value at the specified memory location Syntax MCO lt mem gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 Remarks Clears the offset value at memory store lt mem gt to 0 0 dBm Clears the frequency value at the specified memory loca tion Syntax MCQ lt mem gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 Remarks Clears the frequency value at memory store lt mem gt to 0 1MHz 6 57 ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION MCR MCT MDI MEN MFG MFM MOF 6 58 Clears the reference value at the specified memory loca tion Syntax mem Remarks MCR lt mem gt Memory location 1 to 30 Clears the reference value at memory store lt mem gt to 0 0 dBm Clears all the entries at the specified memory location Syntax mem Remarks MCT lt mem gt Memory location 1 to 30 Clears frequency cal factor offset and reference values at memory store lt mem gt Disable memory store setting and use Enable setting of the memory stores Also will apply the last memory store configured Set the frequency value at the specified memory location in GHz Syntax mem value Remarks MFG lt mem gt lt gt lt value gt Memory location 1 to 30 Frequency value in GHz Set the frequency value at memory store address lt mem gt to lt value gt GHz Set the frequency value at the specified memory location in MHz Syntax mem value Remark
24. mand Related Commands MMRST Query GRTMM Returned String GRTMM lt mode gt GRYB Set graph Y axis bottom scale PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRYB lt val gt val 150 0 to 250 0 Remarks Itis not necessary to specify units as the displayed units are always as sumed Profile and Source Sweep modes always use dBm but Power vs Time mode can also use dBuV or dBmV Query GRYB Returned String GRYB lt val gt GRYT Set graph Y axis top scale PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRYT lt val gt ML2430A OM 6 45 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION val 150 0 to 250 0 Remarks Itis not necessary to specify units as the displayed units are always as sumed Profile and Source Sweep modes always use dBm but Power vs Time mode can also use dBuV or dBmV Query GRYT Returned String GRYT lt val gt GTO Set to ignore the Group Execute Trigger GET GPIB com GPIB TRIGGER mon command Syntax GTO Remarks The ML2430A Series will ignore the GET command or a TRG Related Commands TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GT1 GT2 GT1 Set GET command to TR1 type immediate trigger GPIB TRIGGER Syntax GT1 Remarks When the ML2430A Series receives a GET or TRG command the system will perform a TR1 type trigger command Related Commands TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT2 GT2 Set GET command to TR2 type settling delay trigger GPIB TRIGGER Syntax GT2 Remarks When the ML2430A Series receives a GET or TRG comma
25. or maximum if MAX mode 2 cursor 2 minimum reading or maximum if MAX mode AP Power diff between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums or maximums if MAX mode T1 Time at cursor 1 T2 Time at cursor 2 Data hold MIN amp MAX 1 cursor 1 MIN reading cursor 1 MAX reading 2 cursor 2 MIN reading cursor 2 MAX reading At Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 Source Sweep mode Data hold NORMAL or AVERAGE 1 cursor 1 reading 4 26 ML2430A OM OPERATION ML2430A OM Display SYSTEM MENU 2 cursor 2 reading AP Power difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 X1 X axis at cursor 1 X2 X axis at cursor 2 Data hold MIN or MAX 1 cursor 1 minimum reading or maximum if MAX mode 2 cursor 2 minimum reading or maximum if MAX mode AP Power diff between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums or maximums if MAX mode X1 X axis at cursor 1 X2 X axis at cursor 2 Data hold MIN amp MAX 1 cursor 1 MIN reading cursor 1 MAX reading 2 cursor 2 MIN reading cursor 2 MAX reading CLEAR Available in Profile Source Sweep and Power vs Time modes GPRST when the DATA HOLD representation selection is not set to NORMAL or AVERAGE for Power vs Time Pressing the CLEAR key restarts the min max collection LINK Links the screen cursors in Profile and Power vs Time modes so CURSOR that when one is moved both are moved When the cursors are CURLK linked a horizontal bar is drawn between them on the screen If one cursor is moved the ot
26. or set to integer multiples of 1 PRF Pulse Repetition Fre quency Enter the delay period in ms or us ML2430A OM OPERATION NOTE Useful for tracking peak levels over a pe riod of time or detect ing glitches Power vs Time Source sweep ML2430A OM SYSTEM MENU DATA HOLD This selects how the graph is displayed on the screen Select from GRPIX NORMAL Min amp Max Min or Max NOTE If either Min amp Max Min or Max is selected the display will keep the old data and may appear stationary The DATA HOLD mode in use is displayed on the left of the screen below the middle value of the y axis With Min amp Max selected the minimum and maximum points for each sample are shown If Connect Points is ON default SYSTEM Graphics CONNECT a vertical bar is drawn between these points See CLEAR under CONTROL to restart the process Min displays only the minimum for this sample position until reset by returning to NORMAL Max displays only the maximum for this sample position until reset by returning to NORMAL This soft key becomes available when the System Setup MODE is set to Power vs Time mode Power vs Time mode displays measurements in a chart like for mat showing history over a period of time The measurements displayed are taken under the conditions of the Readout mode and can therefore include all triggering and correction settings set up in that mode Power vs Time operation mode includ
27. see Table B 13 Table B 1 BNC Functional Group Commands Command Function Page IBBLP 6 41 OBACM 6 57 OBCH 6 57 OBDSP 6 45 OBDST 6 58 OBMD 6 59 OBPL 6 59 OBVSP 6 59 OBVST 6 60 OBZL BNC RF blanking output level 6 60 Table B 2 Calibration Functional Group Commands Command Function Page CAL Calibrate the selected sensor to 0 dBm 6 21 RFCAL Turn RF reference calibrator ON or OFF 6 67 VZERO Zero the BNC input connector 6 82 ZERO Zero the sensor 6 82 ML2430A OM B 1 ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B Table B 3 Channel Functional Group Commands Command Function Page CHCFG 6 28 CHRES 6 28 CHUNIT 6 28 FHOLD 6 38 HLIM 6 49 HLIMS 6 50 HOLD 6 50 LLIM 6 52 LLIMS 6 52 MMRST 6 53 MNMXS 6 53 REL Relative control 6 67 Table B 4 Data Output Functional Group Commands Command Function Page ERRLST 6 36 GMNMX 6 39 GRDRQ 6 41 MNGDB 6 47 MNGD 6 53 MXGDB 6 49 MXGD 6 56 O 6 57 OGBD 6 63 OGD 6 64 ON 6 64 STATUS 6 72 STERR 6 74 SYSLD 6 74 SYSRD Output the saved setup over the GPIB 6 75 Table B 5 Display Functional Group Commands Command Function Page DCONT 6 32 DCONTD 6 33 DCONTU 6 33 DISP 6 33 DPEAK Peak meter display 6 33 B 2 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B Table B 6 GPIB 488 2 Functional Group Commands Command CLS ESE ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC RST SRE DRE STB TRG TST Ol Function Clear GPIB status byt
28. so that some menu options may not always be available as shown Refer to Chapter Four Operation for more detailed explanations of menu functions The Sensor menu presents controls for sensor data processing NOT in ML2437A Only display when universal power sensor with option 01 data is connected to selected input available in readout and power vs time system setup modes Default mod average custom Sensor Setup SENSOR A B SENMO OPTION TRMS FCW SENMM Measurement MODE SENSTL SETTLE per reading 0 01 to 10 RGH Range HOLD Auto 1to5 CalFactor SENSOR A B ML2430A OM available in readout and power vs time system setup modes with default measurement mode not available in power vs time system setup mode not in ML2437A C 1 SENSOR MENU CFSRC CFVAL CVSTF CVSPF ICVSTV ICVSPV CFFRQ CFUSL CFUTBL CFUUSE CFUVLD CFUNITS CFUADD CFULD CFURD C 2 APPENDIX C SOURCE Frequency manual vghz SETUP if source VGHz only START Freq 10kHz to 122GHz STOP Freq 10kHz to 122GHz START Volts 0 5V to 20 5V STOP Volts 0 5V to 20 5V Input signal FREQuency if source FREQ or MANUAL 10kHz to 122GHz USE TABLE if source VGHz or FREQ Factory 1 to max tables factory 1 to max tables max tables 10 but determined by space in sensor EEPROM dB EDIT table if source VGHz or FREQ TABLE 1 to max tables EDIT values down Up C
29. such as the edge of the screen or the end of valid data a warning beep is sounded ML2430A OM OPERATION SYSTEM MENU ML2430A OM Print This selection prints the screen and various operational settings through the rear PRINT panel printer port ANRITSU Power Meter ML2437A s n 97180010 Firmware 2 02 sensor A NOT FITTED sensor Measurement Setup A Measurement mode Default Cal factor Frequency 50 00MHz Averaging mode amp number Auto Low level averaging Low Offset type amp value Off Settle per reading 0 10 Range hold Off Sensor zeroed No Measurement Channel Setup 1 A 2 OFF Trigger source Continuous Trigger sample delay 1 00ms Trigger gate width 20 00ms Trigger arm Blanking OFF ALGA Limit OTI Low limit Off Limits test OTE Readout L Measured value o Figure 4 7 Sample ML2430A Series Printout Battery Controls battery setup when the optional battery pack is installed AUTO BAUTS Enables or disables the automatic power off feature Automatic power off can be used to conserve battery power when operating from the internal battery TIME BAUTT When operating from the internal battery Time sets the number of minutes that the instrument will run before powering off in absence of any key activity Enter a value of 10 to 240 minutes STATUS Displays the installed battery type remaining capacity esti mated operating time remaining minutes and the battery s full charge capacity m
30. 2 to 15 6 GHz CUR 2 15 6GHz ML2430A OM 6 29 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Related Commands GRDDT SRCSPFRQ SRCSTFRQ SRCSTPWR SRCSPPWR CURLK Link cursors in all graphic modes PROFILE SETUP Syntax CURLK lt state gt state ON OFF Remarks Links the two cursors together on the graph When either cursor moves left or right the other cursor follows Subsequent changes to delay will move both cursors Query CURLK Returned String CURLK lt state gt CVSPF V GHz calibration factor stop frequency SENSOR Syntax CVSPF lt s gt lt val gt units s AorB val 10 kHz to 122 GHz Remarks Sets the stop frequency of the V GHz calibration factor settings Example CVSPF A 20 GHz Related Commands CVSPV CVSTF CVSTV Query CVSPF lt s gt Returned String CVSPF lt s gt lt val gt CVSPV V GHz calibration factor stop voltage SENSOR Syntax CVSPV lt s gt lt val gt units s AorB val O 5 to 20 5 Remarks Sets the stop voltage of the VGHz calibration factor settings 6 30 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION Related Commands Query Returned String CVSTF Syntax S val Remarks Related Commands Query Returned String CVSTV Syntax S val Remarks Related Commands Query Returned String DBLGHT Syntax mode ML2430A OM V GHz calibration factor start frequency V GHz calibration factor start voltage Battery LCD Ba
31. 4 Execution Error This bit is set when incorrect data is sent to the power meter e g ADDR 57 would result in an Execution Error as the al lowable address value range is 1 to 30 Bit 3 Device Dependent Error DDE This bit is set true whenever a meas urement error occurs Device Dependent Errors are ZERO fail Zero attempted for a sensor and failed CAL O dBm fail O dBm value to far out Display channel number goes out of displayable range Displayable range is 99 999 to 99 999 dBm Illegal log calculation for a channel When a channel input ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS configuration combines sensors the combination is done in linear units If the result of the combination produces a negative linear value and the displayed units are log i e dB this would be an illegal logarithmic operation Printer error A print was requested and this error was returned Request for data from a channel with no sensor connected Bit O Operation Complete This bit is set when the OPC command com pletes and can be used to tell the controller the unit has completed those commands just sent See OPC and OPC for more details All other bits are not used The bits above are 488 2 common bits The ERRLST command will return an error list giving the state of the DDE causes Related Commands ESR ESE ERRLST Standard Event Status Register ESR Power On O User Request C Command
32. 42 GRPIX 6 42 GRPRD 6 43 GRPTP 6 43 GRSWP 6 44 GRSWR 6 44 GRTMM 6 45 GRYB 6 45 GRYT Set profile Y axis top scale 6 44 Table B 10 Sensor Functional Group Commands Command Function Page AVG 6 17 AVGLL 6 19 AVGM 6 19 CFADJ 6 21 CFCAL 6 21 CFFRQ 6 22 CFSRC 6 22 CFUADD 6 23 CFUCT 6 23 CFUID 6 24 CFULD 6 24 CFUPT 6 25 CFURD 6 25 CFUSAV 6 26 CFUSEL 6 26 CFUTBL 6 26 CFUUSE 6 26 CFUVLD 6 27 CFVAL 6 27 CVSPF 6 30 CVSPV 6 30 CVSTF 6 31 CVSTV 6 31 DUTY 6 34 DUTYS Duty cycle state 6 35 B 4 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE Command Function Page OFFCLR 6 60 OFFFIX 6 61 OFFTBL 6 61 OFFTBR 6 62 OFFTBU 6 62 OFFTYP 6 63 OFFVAL 6 63 RGH 6 67 SENMM 6 69 SENMO 6 69 SENSTL 6 70 SENTYP Return sensor information 6 70 Table B 11 System Functional Group Commands Command Function Page RCL 6 10 SAV 6 15 BAUTS 6 19 BAUTT 6 20 BUFF 6 20 CUR 6 29 DBLGHT 6 31 DBLTIM 6 32 ENTERR 6 36 FBEEP 6 38 FROFF 6 39 FRST 6 39 GRAUTO 6 40 GRDDT 6 41 KEYCK 6 51 MODDEL 6 54 MODINIT 6 54 MODLIM 6 54 MODPH 6 55 MODPWR 6 55 MODRED 6 55 MODRNG 6 56 OPMD 6 65 PRINT 6 65 PRNSEL 6 66 RSBAUD 6 67 SECURE 6 68 SRCMOD 6 70 SRCSTREQ 6 71 SRCSPFRQ 6 70 SRCSTPWR 6 71 SRCSPPWR Source sweep stop power 6 71 ML2430A OM B 5 ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B SRCSTAT Source sweep status r
33. 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 NHOQUCNOM lt gt s s acs s aue pa e Be ae eee ee ew eRe eG 6 1 Typographic Conventions oaoa oaoa a 6 1 Data I O Formats 5 260 ss eee Boe O ee ee dr 6 1 Query Commands assess ASAS 56 ha RA 6 4 GPIB PC Card Setup a a a 6 5 Using 488 1 GPIB os soii E 6 6 Using 488 2 GPIB co o mo rs a DA E he Sw 6 7 Service Request Status SRQ 008 6 9 Functional Groups 24 2 Bes so 6 ae Bao raro SRG q 6 10 ML24XXA Native Commands 5 02 5084 6 12 GPIB Emulation Modes ae 6 84 ML4803A Emulation Commands 4 6 85 HP 436A Emulation Commands 6 96 HP 437B Emulation Commands 6 101 HP 438A Emulation Commands 6 118 Programming Examples 0 005002 6 129 ML2430A OM Appendix A Specifications A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 Introduction A 1 System Specifications o aoao a A 1 System Defaults see eee eae bow ee eee ee eee eS A 6 System Error Messages 2 a a o A 11 Appendix B GPIB Quick Reference B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 Introduction B 1 ML24XXA Quick Reference 0 00 eee ee ees B 1 Appendix C Menu Maps Index ML2430A OM C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 ML4803A Quick Reference a B 9 HP 436A Qui
34. COMMANDS 6 110 LN OC OD OF Set linear units Syntax Remarks GPIB OPERATION LN Changes the display to linear units Watts Set calibrator state Syntax State Remarks OC lt state gt O OFF 1 ON For example OCO reference calibrator state set to OFF Output the display Syntax Remarks Offset state Syntax OD Outputs a formatted display channel reading in either dBs or Watts Will also output the cal factor tables as described below The only way to read out the cal factor table data from the HP 437 is to send the commands to display each entry on the screen and then ask for a text display output using the OD command The ML2430A Series supports the OD command to the extent that it will output a formatted display channel reading in either dBs or Watts and will also output the cal factor tables After sending the ETn command n the cal factor table number if an OD is sent the first frequency cal factor entry of the cal factor table is output in the HP format If this is then followed by an EN the next cal factor entry pair is available for output and can be read using the OD command When all the pairs are output all further ENOD combinations output a frequency of 00 00 MHz 100 0 The EX command terminates this action so that further OD commands now output the display reading in a formatted mode If RFnOD n cal factor table number is sent t
35. DATA OUTPUT 6 56 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Syntax MXGD Remarks Available in graph modes only Outputs in ASCII form the max graph data The format is as follows MX GD lt number_of_elements gt lt element_1 gt lt element_2 gt lt ele ment_n gt lt n gt The first number in the string is the number of elements to follow and is al ways 200 for the ML2430A Series O Return display channel reading DATA OUTPUT Syntax O lt c gt c 1or2 Remarks Readout and Power vs Time modes only Returns the next measured reading available in the output buffer from the selected channel The read ing will sit in the output buffer until it is read If another reading is re quested that reading will be buffered after the previous reading If the first reading requested is read before another request for data the output buffer will be empty The MAV bit in the status byte will always indicate the state of the buffer The display is updated at a constant rate with available readings if the display is on If the selected channel is turned off an execution error is returned The re turned string is the value plus a line feed hex OXOA no terminators OBACM AC mod output polarity configuration BNC Syntax OBACM lt polarity gt polarity POS positive NEG negative Remarks Changes the polarity of the AC mod BNC output signal Query OBACM Returned String OBACM lt polarity gt OBCH BNC
36. Emulation commands must not have a space between the command header and the parameter or commas between the parameters The format for HP Emulation commands is lt command header gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed charac ter OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Transmission State EOI or both The ML2430A Series in HP 438A emulation mode also supports the HP 437B cal factor table edit and read commands HP Identity request Syntax Remarks Set SRE mask Syntax val Remarks 21D The format of the returned string is lt Company name gt lt model gt lt serial gt lt firmware version gt l lt val gt 8 bit mask Status Byte Structure HP 438A Bit O Data ready Bit 1 Cal Zero complete Bit 2 Entry Error Bit 3 Measurement error Bit 4 Over Under limit Bit 5 Event Status Register HP 437B only Bit 6 Request Service Bit 7 N A Set display to A B Syntax AD 6 117 HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION AP AR BD BP BR CL 6 118 Remarks Display the Input A reading minus the Input B reading Set single sensor A display Syntax AP Remarks Set the display to output Input A readings Set display A B Syntax AR Remarks Display the Input A reading divided by the Input B reading Set display B A Syntax BD Remarks Display the Input B reading minus the Input A reading
37. FBEEP lt c gt Returned String FBEEP lt c gt lt state gt FHOLD Fail indicator Hold CHANNEL Syntax FHOLD lt c gt lt state gt c lore state ON or OFF Remarks f the high or low limits fail and this setting is turned on the fail status con tinues until the command is turned off All BNC outputs beeps and dis plays continue to be in the fail state until after the OFF is received Related Commands FBEEP Query FHOLD lt c gt Returned String _FHOLD lt c gt lt state gt 6 38 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION FROFF FRST GMNMX ML2430A OM ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Frequency Offset Display SYSTEM Syntax FROFF lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks This command turns on the top line information text displaying the frequency and offset for the sensors used similar to the min max data display except the left hand data is for sensor A and the right hand is for sensor B This command is only valid if the sensor cal factor source is set to either frequency or V GHz and the sensor is used in a displayed chan nel The display is FQ nn nnGHz OS nnn nnn for each sensor The frequency FQ is the entered frequency if the cal factor source is set to frequency or the calculated frequency if the cal factor source is V GHz The offset OS is the fixed offset if set to fixed or the offset table interpo lated offset value depending on the frequency if the offset for the sensor is set to table If the offset for that
38. Limited to 10 stores None None None None None Always returns 0 Not supported None Not supported None B 17 HP IB SUPPORT HP 438A Commands B 18 Mnemonic AD AE AP AR BD BE BP BR CL CS DA DD DE DO EN FA FH FM GTO GT1 GT2 KB LG LH LL LMO LM1 LN LP LP2 OCO OC1 OS PR RA RC RH RLO RL1 RM Action Supported Disable display Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a ba Display to offset No Enter msg terminator Yes Auto average Yes Average old Yes Manual average Yes ignore GET Yes TA1 On GET Yes TA2 on GET Yes Setcalfactor Yes Units to dBm Yes Set highimit Yes Setlowlimit Yes Limit oheck of Yes Limitoheckon Yes Units to Watts Yes Leammode2 no RF calibrator off Yes RF calibratoron Yes New relative value Yes Yes Set sensor range Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes APPENDIX B Restrictions None None None None None None None None None None None DISP OFF restrictions Screen and min max not updated Relative not active DISP ON None Not supported None None None None None None None None None On channel not sensor On channel not sensor Both high and low off as HP437B Both high and low on as HP437B
39. OFF 1 ON 1 GPIB DISP command status 0 OFF 1 ON 2 GPIB FAST status 0 OFF 1 ON STERR Returns results of POST or TST DATA OUTPUT Syntax STERR Remarks Returns lt sp gt space FLASH lt sp gt 0xnnnn CALDAT lt sp gt 0xnnnn PER Related Commands SON lt sp gt 0xnnnn RAM lt sp gt 0xnnnn NON VOL lt sp gt 0xnnnn LCD lt sp gt 0xnnnn KBD lt sp gt 0xnnnn DSP lt sp gt 0xnnnn n FLASH checksum test 0x0000 Passed Oxffff Failed CALDAT checksum test 0x0000 Passed Oxffff Failed PERSONality data 0x0000 Passed Oxffff Failed RAM read write test 0x0000 Passed Oxffff Failed NONVOL RAM test 0x0000 Passed 0x0001 Software version fail 0x0002 Current store fail 0x0004 Saved store fail 0x0008 secure mode fail Oxffff read failure LCD memory test 0x0000 Passed Oxffff Failed KBD stuck key test 0x0000 Passed Oxffff Failed DSP test 0x0000 Passed else FATAL error START CONT SYSLD Load saved setup store over the GPIB DATA OUTPUT Syntax store number data length binary data SYSLD lt store number gt lt data length gt lt binary data gt 1 to 10 number of bytes of binary data Saved data previously read from the meter using the SYSRD command ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks Sets the passed store number to the setup contained in the binary data that was extracted using the SYSRD command Related Commands
40. Reset Device GPIB 488 2 Syntax RST Remarks Resets the ML2430A Series to the default configuration see Appendix A Section A 3 Offset tables are not cleared The GPIB address and emula tion settings are not changed and the input queue output queue and status registers on the GPIB are not cleared This command produces the same result as the front panel key sequence System Setup PRE SET RESET SAV Save configuration SYSTEM Syntax SAV lt val gt val 1to10 Remarks Saves the configuration of the power meter into the memory location specified Sensor Setup Channel Setup and Trigger Setup are saved along with all other instrument parameters ML2430A OM 6 15 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION SRE SRE STB TRG 6 16 Related Commands RCL Setup service request enable register GPIB 488 2 Syntax SRE lt val gt val 8 bit mask Remarks Sets the Service request enable register bits Return Service Request Enable register GPIB 488 2 Syntax SRE Remarks Returns the Service Request Enable register Return Status Byte register GPIB 488 2 Syntax STB Remarks Returns the status byte value with bit 6 replaced with the MSS value MSS is the GPIB Master Summary Status and indicates that the device has at least one reason for requesting service Although the MSS message is sent in bit position 6 of the device s response to the STB query it is not sent in response to a serial poll and sh
41. SYSRD SYSLNM Saved set naming SYSTEM Syntax SYSLNM lt store number gt lt text gt store number 1 to 10 text text string Remarks This command allows the saved setups to have text associated with them rather than just the USED and NOT USED text Query SYSLNM lt store number gt Returned String SYSLNM lt store number gt lt store name gt If a store number of O is used then all the store titles will be output in the form SYSLNM 1 lt store 1 name gt 2 lt store 2 name gt 10 lt store 10 name gt SYSRD Output the saved setup over the GPIB DATA OUTPUT Syntax SYSRD lt store number gt store O current setup or 1 to 10 saved stores number Remarks Requests that the saved stored setup is output over the GPIB This is a BI NARY output that allows the stored setup to be programmed into other ML2430A Series power meters and stores via the SYSLD command If a request for a store number that has not had a setup stored into it is made an execution error event will be set in the Event Status Register ESR The output is in the form SYSRD lt ws gt lt gt lt num_digits gt lt number num_digits long gt lt binary data gt lt num_digits gt Number of following digits giving the number of bytes of bi nary data lt number num_digits long gt A number num_digits long giving the number of bytes of binary data lt binary data gt Saved setup ML2430A OM 6 75 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMAND
42. SYSTEM display battery backlight display contrast peak meter display frequency offset display GPIB user text display backlight timed time SYSTEM sound key click state edit error beep limits fail beep channel 1 limits fail beep channel 2 cursor off screen beep SYSTEM battery if present auto power off auto power off time SYSTEM rear panel GPIB GPIB address emulation mode SYSTEM rear panel RS232 mode baud rate modem auto SYSTEM rear panel BNC output 1 amp 2 mode mode analog out channel start volts stop volts start display value stop display value mode pass fail channel pass level output 1 only mode AC MOD output output polarity SYSTEM DEFAULTS on 5 off off off 5 minutes off off off off off enable 30 min 13 factory preset only ML24xx factory preset only EXT COMMS 9600 factory preset only redial count 5 delay 5 minutes limits false range false power false off O volts 5 volts 10 dB O dB 4 high off positive A 9 SYSTEM DEFAULTS A 10 output 2 only mode RF blanking channel output TTL during zero input 1 blanking active TTL level SYSTEM rear panel printer printer type SYSTEM graphics connect graph points tracking min max graph ref line pre trigger percentage SYSTEM secure secure state CAL ZERO RF calibrator APPENDIX A high high HP Deskjet 340 factory preset only
43. V GHz set Sensor CalFactor Source to V GHz To use the External Volts Input set Channel Setup Input to EXT V MODE output ports only OFF output set to ground port 1 or 2 Analog OUT analog scaled output port 1 or 2 provides an output voltage proportional to the measurement RF Blanking output 2 only provides a logic level output during the ZERO process This can be used to switch off RF from external sources PASS FAIL port 1 or 2 logic level output Signal channel A or B port 1 or port 2 provides a real time output from the signal channel Being real time it shows modulation etc and is taken after the signal has been through range amplifiers It is not directly proportional to the measurement Leveling A or B range 1 or 2 port 1 or 2 This is similar to the sig nal channel A or B outputs except it connects to range 1 or 2 only of the signal channel See below for more information on leveling ML2430A OM OPERATION SYSTEM MENU ACMod output port 1 only is a TTL signal synchronized to the in ternal chopper when used of the signal channel This signal can be used for synchronization with external sources or when viewing AC range chopped signals Leveling outputs To allow the power meter to be used in a leveling loop the sig nal channel output is available on the rear panel The leveling loop will be broken every time the signal channel autoranges To overcome this the outputs of ranges 1 and 2 can b
44. adapter and an MA2499B The Rear Panel connectors are illustrated and described in Figure 3 2 ML2430A OM OPERATION GPIB IEEE488 Connector Standard General Purpose Inter face Bus connector used to con nect through GPIB to other test Parallel Printer Port Provides an interface to a stan dard parallel printer Compatible printers include the Canon BJC8O0 HP 340 Deskjet and most other 300 and 500 Series HP Deskjet ID Number Label The ML2430A Series ID number is affixed to the rear panel here Please use the complete ID number when ordering parts or corre sponding with the Anritsu Customer Service depart REAR PANEL CONNECTORS AC Main Power Input 85 264 VAC 47 440 Hz 40 VA maximum The Power Meter automati cally configures itself for the voltage applied Connecting AC power here will turn the instrument on Subsequently the instrument can be switched between the ON state and the STANDBY state using the front panel ON OFF button The optional battery can be fast charged when AC input voltage is applied through this connector and all other Power Meter func equipment and a host computer printers m nt tions are off The ML2430A Series is compatible with IEEE 488 1 requirements Refer to Chapter 6 GPIB Program Chassis Ground HE for information on using Used as a convenient earth ground reference when DC line power is applied and an optional safety RS232 Serial Conn
45. and a HOLD OFF after This will make sure that the sample data and the graph data agree If not in Power vs Time mode this command will set an execution error Ol Output device identification GPIB 488 2 Syntax OI Remarks Returned format lt Company name gt lt model gt lt serial gt lt firmware version gt ON Output number of channel readings DATA OUTPUT 6 64 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Syntax ON lt c gt lt val gt c 1or2 val 1to 1000 Remarks Readout and Power vs Time modes only This command returns the speci fied number of readings for the specified channel The readings are first assembled and then passed to the GPIB as a whole with a line feed char acter hex 0x0a marking the end of the string Example ON 1 9 This example will return 10 234 10 234 10 235 10 238 10 250 10 270 10 500 10 934 12 234 lt 0x0a gt OPMD ML2430A Series operation mode SYSTEM Syntax OPMD lt mode gt mode DIGIT PROFILE PWRTIM SRCSWP Remarks This command selects the ML2430A Series operation mode data collec tion method DIGIT digital read out of channel data PROFILE profile of graphic display PWRTIM graph of channel power versus time SRCSWP source sweep graphic display To use Graph output commands the ML2430A Series must be in Profile or Power vs Time mode To use the output channel data commands the ML2430A Series must be in the digital re
46. and must be available in the cable as hardware handshaking is always enabled The DTR and DSR lines are con nected together within the meter The ML2430A Series Power Meter serial connector pinouts are PIN SIGNAL NOT USED RX data TX data DTR handshake signal signal ground DSR handshake signal RTS handshake signal CTS handshake signal NOT USED O O NJ O OI BAB O0O N The serial interface baud rate can be set using the System Rear panel RS232 menu selection or the RSBAUD command page 6 67 Available baud rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 default 19200 and 38400 Other parameters are pre defined as 8 bits no parity and 1 stop bit and cannot be changed Commands are entered as with the GPIB interface conforming to the command format for the operation emulation mode selected All GPIB commands are sup ported There are some additional commands specific to the serial interface that are prefixed with an exclamation mark In the emulation modes when running under GPIB the measured data is always available when the meter has been ad dressed to talk In serial mode the meter cannot be addressed to talk but mea surement data can still be obtained by using the GPIB trigger commands TR1 and TR2 in the HP 437 and HP 438 emulation modes and T and in the HP 436 emulation mode All GPIB type commands and command strings should be ter minated with a new line character OA hex The special serial mode commands d
47. applied as fol lows If the channel value is greater than the high limit and the high limit is turned ON a FAIL is indicated If the channel value is below the low limit and the low limit is ON a FAIL is indicated Otherwise if any limit is ON and a FAIL is not detected PASS is indicated HIGH Limit Sets the high limit It is not necessary to enter the units as the limit HLIM value is checked against the displayed value Therefore if the limits 4 14 ML2430A OM OPERATION NOTE In Profile mode the limit value is only checked against dB values as Profile mode only works in dB ML2430A OM LOW Limit LLIM HIGH State HLIMS LOW State LLIMS FAIL HOLD FHOLD BEEP FBEEP CHANNEL MENU have been set for 10 dBm and the display units are subsequently changed from dBm to Watts the system still checks for the reading to rise above 10 even though the display units type has been changed Enter a value from Units Min Max dBm 99 99 dBmV 147 00 dBuV 207 00 Watis 0 0 50 0 Setting a limit value automatically turns on the limit state except when done via GPIB Sets the low limit It is not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked against the displayed value Select ON or OFF to enable or disable high limit checking Select ON or OFF to enable or disable low limit checking If FAIL HOLD is ON both the screen FAIL indicator and the BNC output are held in the fail state
48. detailed information on proper connector care The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be operated from either AC line power external DC power or from the optional internal battery The ML2430A Series Power Meter is intended as an Installation Overvoltage Category Il Insulation Category device At power on the power meter will perform a brief power on self test POST If a POST error occurs information and available options will be displayed on the screen See Chapter 4 page 4 3 If the POST is suc cessful the instrument will load the last used configuration unless Secure mode has been selected see Chapter 4 page 4 34 or Chapter 6 page 6 68 AC Line Power The ML2430A Series Power Meter can operate on AC input power of 85 264V 50 440 Hz 40 VA maximum The Power Meter automatically configures itself for the voltage applied The AC line input is protected by an internal fuse DC Power The ML2430A Series Power Meter can also operate from a nominal external 12 24 VDC input in the ab sence of AC line power DC line power is protected by 2 1 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 2 Battery Power INSTALLATION a fuse mounted inside the unit on the main board A grounding terminal is provided on the rear panel to ground the unit during operation from a DC supply The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be operated using the optional internal battery pack During battery operation an icon will be displayed on measurement screens indicati
49. example FF FF D1 64 11932 As it is based on 1024 per dB divide by 1024 to get the dB value 11 652 MNGD Output Min Graph Data DATA OUTPUT Syntax MNGD Remarks Available in graph modes only Outputs in ASCII form the min graph data The format is as follows ML2430A OM 6 53 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION MNMXS MODDEL MODINIT MODLIM 6 54 MNGD lt number_of_elements gt lt element_1 gt lt element_2 gt lt ele ment_n gt lt n gt The first number in the string is the number of elements to follow and is al ways 200 for the ML2430A Series Track min and max values CHANNEL Syntax MNMXS lt c gt lt state gt c Tor2 state ON or OFF Remarks Turns ON or OFF the min max tracking for the specified channel The MMRST command resets the values Related Commands MMRST Query MNMXS lt c gt Returned String MNMXS lt c gt lt state gt Modem redial delay time SYSTEM Syntax MODDEL lt value gt value 1to 10 Remarks Sets the autodial delay between retrys The value is the number of minutes to delay between each autodial retry after a failure to connect This interval can be set from 1 to 10 minutes See Section 5 10 for more information on modem operation Query MODDEL Returned String MODDEL lt value gt Initialize modem Syntax Remarks MODINIT Initializes the modem connected to the ML2430A serial port See Section 5 10 for more information on modem operation Autodi
50. if the display trigger delay is 1 PRF Query GRPTP Returned String GRPTP lt val gt GRSWP Graph Averaging Number for Profile or Source Sweep PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRSWP lt s gt lt val gt s AorB val 1to 512 Remarks f GRSWS is set to ON the points on the graph represent the averaged value of that point against its averaged value since either the graph averageing was reset or since it was turned on Related Commands GRSWR GRSWS Query GRSWP lt s gt Returned String GRSWP lt s gt lt val gt GRSWR Reset Graph Averaging for Profile or Source Sweep PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRSWR Remarks f the Graph averaging mode in ON this command resets the data points and restarts the averaging Related Commands GRSWP GRSWS GRSWS Graph Average State for Profile or Source Sweep PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRSWS lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks Turns Graph Averaging on or off 6 44 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Related Commands GRSWP GRSWR Query GRSWS Returned String GRSWS lt state gt GRTMM Profile Min Max tracking mode PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRTMM lt mode gt mode SINGLE INFINITE Remarks Set Minimum and maximum tracking mode between the cursors SINGLE Resets min and max values after each sweep INFINITE Never resets the min and max values The min amp max values are updated after each sweep NOTE The INFINITE tracking mode can be reset using the MMRST com
51. lt val gt OBVST BNC analog output start voltage scale BNC Syntax OBVST lt port gt lt val gt port 1or2 val 5 00 to 5 00 Volts Remarks Sets up the start value for the voltage output in analog output mode At tempting to set the start value to a voltage greater than the stop value or the stop value lower than the start value will result in an execution error Query OBVST lt port gt Returned String OBVST lt port gt lt val gt OBZL BNC RF blanking output level when zeroing BNC Syntax OBZL lt level gt level HIGH TTL high LOW TTL low Remarks Sets the TTL level of the BNC RF blanking output Query OBZL Returned String OBZL lt level gt OFFCLR Clear an offset table SENSOR Syntax OFFCLR lt val gt val 1to5 Remarks Sets all the values in the table specified to O dB and 0 00 Hz 6 60 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS OFFFIX Offset fixed value SENSOR Syntax OFFFIX lt s gt lt val gt units s AorB val 99 999 to 99 999 units dB Remarks The value added to the sensor if the offset type is set to FIXED Example To set the fixed offset for sensor A to 47 dBm OFFFIX A 47DB Query OFFFIX lt s gt Returned String OFFFIX lt s gt lt val gt OPETBL Specify the table used to apply offsets to the sensor SENSOR Syntax OFFTBL lt s gt lt val gt s AorB val 1to5 Remarks f the Offset Type is set to TABLE use this command to specify which
52. move together as one This is dis ML2430A OM PROCEDURES Triggered Measurements ML2430A OM PROFILE OPERATION MODE cussed more fully in the Triggered Measurements section below Range Hold may be selected see page 4 6 to limit dy namic range and prevent small range change distur bances on very high speed signals Use Range Hold 1 for measurements down to 25 dBm and Range Hold 2 up to 25 If the display update is turned off via GPIB only the average is updated Since non triggered measurements are of limited use in the PROFILE mode most applications require triggering For example 1 Provide a 1 kHz square wave modulated signal to sensor A and set TRIGGER SETUP MODE to Internal A Int A This causes the PROFILE sweep to wait until a certain power level is present on the sensor before starting the Sweep 2 The DELAY and WIDTH parameters as discussed above are the positions of the two CURSORS These can be set to specific locations for example if the sig nal is a 1 KHz square wave setting the DELAY to 250 us places the cursor in the first cycle at the midpoint of one of the phases Setting the WIDTH to 500 us sets the other CURSOR to exactly one half cycle later thus allowing display of the power levels in the two phases of the signal NOTE If the modulation is turned off then the trigger conditions will not be met and the sweep will not continue to be up dated This is useful to freeze a display
53. number up to 40 characters Autodial enable for power on Modem redial count 0 to 10 default 5 Autodial enable for range failure The RS232 type commands BYE ISPL and DCL do NOT require terminating All other commands or command strings require a new line character to terminate Refer to Section 4 7 System Menu for information on using the front panel menus to configure modem operation Refer to Section 6 10 ML24XX Native GPIB Commands for information on using GPIB commands to configure modem operation 5 RS232 MODEM SUPPORT PROCEDURES Modem Compatibility and Commands 5 8 Serial Interface Remote Operation The ML2430A Series Power Meter firmware supports Hayes compatible mo dems The commands used are as follows Command Definition modem escape sequence atz reset modem to factory defaults at amp h1 amp r2x4v1q0f1s0 1e0 initialize modem for power meter use atd number dial number This section presents an example of Autodial using a terminal emulator on a re mote computer An newline r carriage return 1 Initialize local modem using the same setup as the power meter at amp hl r2x4vlqg0fls0 le0 r amp h1 transmit data flow control use CTS Y 2 receive data flow control use RTS x4 full result code setting v1 result codes in verbal mode q0 result codes displayed El local data echo OFF s0 1 auto answer after 1 ring e0 local command echo off The modem should
54. of the five offset tables to apply to the sensor The tables are a set of frequency against dB offsets The offset value used from the table depends on the setting of the frequency correction source If the source is FREQUENCY the entered frequency is used to calculate the offset from the table If the frequency correction source is V GHz the fre quency value calculated from the supplied ramp input is used to calculate the offset from the table If the frequency does not match any frequency in the table interpolation is used to calculate the correct offset NOTE If the frequency is greater than the maximum frequency in the table the offset value from the maximum table fre quency is used If the frequency is less than the minimum frequency in the table the offset from the minimum table frequency is used The frequency comparisons start from the beginning of the table if the entry is O Hz this is counted as the end of the table Query OFFTBL lt s gt ML2430A OM 6 61 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 62 Returned String OFFTBL lt s gt lt val gt OFFTBR Output an offset table SENSOR Syntax OFFTBR lt val gt val 1to5 Remarks Outputs the selected offset table The returned string is constructed as fol lows OFFTBR lt length gt lt number_of_bytes gt lt element1 lt element2 gt lt ele mentn gt Where lt length gt is the character size of the lt number_of_bytes gt field and lt number_of_bytes gt i
55. on single sweep off 10 off off ML2430A OM APPENDIX A A 4 SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES ML2430A OM SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES This section details some of the front panel error messages that may ap pear In most cases the error condition can be easily corrected If not note the error message and contact the nearest Anritsu Service Center see Chapter 2 Table 2 3 Errors shown here with xxxx in the display contain a numeric error code Error Message SAVE RECALL STORE 0 RECALL EMPTY STORE SAVE RECALL STORE NUMBER SENSOR A over range SENSOR A under range SENSOR B over range SENSOR B under range CHAN 1 display range CHAN 2 display range CHAN illegal LOG calc CHAN 2 illegal LOG calc SENSOR A CAL error xxxx SENSOR A CAL 0 dBm invalid SENSOR B CAL error xxxx SENSOR B CAL 0 dBm invalid SENSOR A NOT ZEROED SENSOR A ZERO SENSOR A ZERO error xxxx SENSOR B NOT ZEROED SENSOR B ZERO SENSOR B ZERO error xxxx Meaning Attempting save to or recall from current store i e O Attempted to recall empty store Illegal store number NOTE Save Recall error messages will only be seen under the following two conditions 1 While doing a save or recall over the GPIB with the measurement display active on the front panel 2 While doing a save or recall from the front panel and quickly exiting to a measurement display when an error is reported Range Hold is selected for Sensor A but the m
56. other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information about safety items and opera tion precautions Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE operating the equipment This symbol indicates a prohibited operation The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically in or near the barred circle This symbol indicates a compulsory safety precaution The required op eration is indicated symbolically in or near the circle This symbol indicates warning or caution The contents are indicated sym bolically in or near the triangle This symbol indicates a note The contents are described in the box Ib OW x These symbols indicate that the marked part should be recycled ias ML2430A OM SAFETY 1 A Repair SAFETY2 For Safety Always refer to the operation manual when working near locations at which the alert mark shown on the left is attached If the operation etc is performed without heeding the advice in the operation manual there is a risk of personal injury In addition the equipment performance may be reduced Moreover this alert mark is sometimes used with other marks and de scriptions indicating other dangers WARNING When supplying AC power to this equipment connect the accessory 3 pin power cord
57. output in scientific notation The exponent may be converted as follows 1 000W 1 000E O 1 000 uW 1 000E 6 1 000 mW 1 000E 3 100 0 nW 100 0E 9 100 0 uW 100 0E 6 10 00 nW 10 00E 9 10 00 uW 10 00E 6 0 100 nW 0 100E 9 For dB rel including and VSWR data the display data is output in fixed notation just as dBm data is REF Set the reference value Syntax REF lt value gt value Reference value Remarks f the display channel is already in relative mode the display value will be updated to be relative to the new reference value set When the display channel is put into relative mode the reference value will be over written with the correct relative value to make the display read O dB RNG Sensor measurement range hold Syntax RNG lt number gt lt number gt 1 Range 1 ML2430A range 5 2 Range 2 ML2430A range 4 3 Range 3 4 Range 4 ML2430A range 2 ML2430A range 3 5 Range 5 ML2430A range 1 A Auto ranging Remarks When the ML2430 is being used to emulate the ML4808 the ranges are reversed that is ML4803 range 1 the lowest power range is equivalent to the ML2430A range 5 and ML4803 range 5 the highest power range is equivalent to the ML2430A range 1 Refer to page 4 6 for more information on sensor ranges SRQ Turns on or off the SRQ on output data ready Syntax SRO lt state gt state 0 0FF 1 ON ML2430A OM 6 93 ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERA
58. output port channel configuration BNC Syntax OBCH lt port gt lt c gt ML2430A OM 6 57 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS port E Remarks Query Returned String OBDSP Syntax port units val Remarks Query Returned String OBDST Syntax port units val Remarks 6 58 BNC analog output display stop value BNC analog out display start value GPIB OPERATION 1or2 1or2 This command changes the channel represented by BNC output modes that can take data from either channel 1 or 2 such as Analog Output and Pass Fail modes OBCH porto OBCH lt port gt lt c gt BNC OBDSP lt port gt lt units gt lt val gt tor2 W Watts DB dB DBM dB DBUV dBuV DBMV dBmV O to 50W 70 to 47dB 23 to 94 dBmV 37 to 154 dBuV Sets up the stop value for the analog out scale of the display OBDSP lt port gt OBDSP lt port gt lt units gt lt val gt SINE OBDST lt ports lt units gt lt val gt tor2 W Watts DB dB DBM dB DBUV dBuV DBMV dBmV O to 50W 70 to 47dB 23 to 94 dBmV 37 to 154 dBuV Sets up the start value for the analog out scale of the display ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Query OBDST lt port gt Returned String OBDST lt port gt lt units gt lt val gt OBMD BNC output mode select BNC Syntax OBMD lt port gt lt mode gt port 1or2 mode OFF output set t
59. rack brackets using 4 screws 900 795 Locate the two front rack brackets C37276 and 49415 at the front of each of the PM s one on each side with four screws 905 68 and four washers 900 345 See max torque setting above Locate the two rear rack brackets C41449 at the back of each of the PM s one on each side with four screws 905 68 and four washers 900 345 See max torque settings page 2 6 Fit the four speed nuts 790 319 to the rack in the correct place to allow mounting of the two PM s in the rack Slide the instruments into the rack and secure with the four decorative screws 900 821 provided 2 RACK MOUNTING INSTALLATION PE 900 345 E x 16 RACKMOUNT SIDE a AE C37279 BRACKET MULTI FIT RACKMOUNT BRACKET 900 807 X2 USE THIS BRACKET CENTER INNER REAR Y WHEN FITTING A a HP34401A 49413 USE THESE FIXINGS RACKMOUNT BRACKET WHEN FITTING A MF2412A 900 795 CENTER REAR COUNTER TO A ML2430A POWER METER o gt FITTING A HP34401A MULTIMETER TO A ML2430A POWER METER 4 900 103 X2 o Ea T A 900 807 X2 vol AS USE THESE FIXINGS WHEN A Y eo NOTE FIT COMPLETED ASSEMBLY TO RACK USING DECORATIVE SCREW 900 821 X4 AND SPEED NUT 790 319 037275 X4 IN 4 CORNER RACKMOUNT POSITIONS AS SHOWN BRACKET CENTER FRONT ass gt 905 63x4 X4 USE THESE FIXINGS WHEN FITTING A HP 34401A TO A ys RACKMOUNT BRACKET ML2430A OR MF2412A gt REAR SUPPORT E X2 C37277 ACO IOUNT U gp 4 USE THESE BRACKE
60. removed This battery is not used for the retention of nonvolatile memory functions Refer to Section 2 7 Battery Charging Removal and Replacement for further infor mation ML2430A OM INSTALLATION 2 5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 2 6 RACK MOUNTING ML2400A 01 Rack Mount Installation ML2430A OM ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Fuses The ML2430A Series Power Meter AC and DC input lines are protected by internally mounted fuses These fuses should only be changed by qualified service per sonnel Replace only with fuses of the same type and rating AC fuse is 2A 250V slow blow DC fuse is 3A 125V slow blow Grounding The ML2430A Series Power Meter must be properly grounded Failure to ground the instrument could be hazardous to operating personnel The meter is sup plied with a three conductor power cord The instru ment is properly grounded during AC line operation when the plug is connected to a properly installed three prong receptacle A grounding terminal is pro vided on the rear panel to ground the unit during op eration from a DC supply The ML2430A Series Power Meter is designed to operate within the tem perature range of 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F with a maximum humidity of 90 at 40 C 104 F non condensing Full accuracy is specified at 5 to 35 C 23 to 95 F Although not recommended operation in temperatures to 20 C 4 F is possible At these temperatures however the liquid crysta
61. respond OK Wm a 2 Dial power meter atd lt phone number gt r When the modem finally connects to the power meter modem the response will be CONNECT n r There might be additional information after CONNECT but before the line termination characters 3 The remote computer is now connected to the power meter The power meter can now be asked to identify itself IDN n The response from an ML2438A operating in native mode will be RANRITSU ML2438A lt serial number gt lt firmware version gt ML2430A OM PROCEDURES RS232 MODEM SUPPORT 4 To set a limit for channel 1 and to have the power meter autodial a remote computer when this limit fails send the following sequence LLIM 1 12DBM Sets low limit on channel 1 to 12dBm LLIMS 1 0N Turn low limit testing ON for channel 1 MODLIM ON Set meter to autodial when any limits fail MODPH lt phone number gt Set phone number to be auto dialed MODRED 3 Set redial count to 3 MODDEL 2 Set delay between each attempt to dial to 2 min 5 Disconnect from power meter and wait for limit failure BE Instruct power meter to hang up its modem Wait at least 1 second wait at least another second The local modem will now respond OK n r The local modem can now be told to hang up using the command ATHO r Again the local modem will respond OK n r 6 When a limits failure occurs the power meter will instruct its modem to dial the previously set up phone number As the con
62. s gt lt val gt s AorB val 0 01 to 10 Remarks Sets how long the system waits for the signal to settle The value parame ter is only used in DEFAULT measurement sensor mode The settling time allows some control over the tradeoff between speed and the extent to which a measurement has settled to its final value Query SENSTL lt s gt Returned String SENSTL lt s gt lt mode gt SENTYP Return sensor information SENSOR Syntax SENTYP lt s gt s AorB Remarks This command returns information on the selected sensor in string format lt sensor type gt lt sensor serial gt For example Dual Diode PBD16 SRCMOD Source Sweep Mode SYSTEM Syntax SRCMOD lt mode gt mode FREQ POWER Remarks Determines whether the voltage sweep applied to the V Ghz analog input on the rear panel is interpreted as a frequency or power sweep The x axis of the graph on the display will be labeled appropriately Query SRCMOD Returned String SRCMOD lt mode gt SRCSPFRQ Source Sweep Stop Frequency SYSTEM Syntax SRCSPFRQ lt freq value gt units freq value 10 kHz to 122 GHz 6 70 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks Determines the stop frequency when in frequency sweep mode Query SRCSPFRQ Returned String SRCSPFRQ lt frequency gt SRCSPPWR Source Sweep Stop Power SYSTEM Syntax SRCSPPWR lt power value gt power value power Remarks Determines the stop power level of
63. sensor by using the EX command or an additional command SV or the data could be lost The saving of the cal factor table data to the sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a particular table ST lt val gt EN 1 to 10 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION SV TRO TRA TR2 ML2430A OM Remarks Example Related Commands HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS Stores the present configuration to the selected register To store the current instrument configuration in register 2 ST2EN RC Save cal factor table Syntax Remarks SV Since the ML2430A stores the cal factor tables in the sensors this command forces the edits to a cal factor table to be saved to the sensor The operation can take a couple of seconds to complete Trigger hold mode Syntax Remarks Related Commands TRO Sets both channels to trigger hold mode It does not trigger until it receives a TR1 or TR2 or GET group executive trigger TRG or TR3 command If it receives a TR3 command it reverts back to the trigger mode it was in be fore the TRO command was sent If the REM line is low this command has no effect TR1 TR2 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 Trigger immediate Syntax Remarks Related Commands TRA Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB After a TR1 command the instrument re
64. sensor is OFF dashes are displayed in the OS part of the top line data Query FROFF Returned String FROFF lt state gt Factory Reset SYSTEM Syntax FRST Remarks Resets the ML2430A Series to the factory default configuration see Ap pendix A Unlike the RST command the offset tables are cleared and all external interfaces are reset Note that any settings in the ESE and SRE registers prior to this command will be reset The equivalent front panel key sequence is System Setup PRESET FACTORY Return the minimum and maximum values DATA OUTPUT Syntax GMNMX lt c gt c 1or2 Remarks When min max tracking is turned on this command is used to read the val ues The format returned is lt min_value gt lt max_value gt 6 39 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION GPRST GRAUTO GRAVG GRCP 6 40 Reset min max graph PROFILE SETUP Syntax GPRST Remarks When profile DATA HOLD mode is set to Min Max points this command is used to reset the min max values for each data point Related Commands GRPIX Auto scaling SYSTEM Syntax GRAUTO Remarks Auto scale for all graphic modes Profile Source Sweep and Power vs Time This command auto scales the y axis only based on the currently displayed data Average between profile cursors PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRAVG lt state gt State ON or OFF Remarks Turns on or off averaging between cursors The data returned by the GRDRQ command includes the average of all data poi
65. supported by the sensor type identity Seven characters or until a message terminator will be read as the identity Remarks Updates the seven character identity string This only affects the copy of the cal factor table stored in the memory of the power meter To take affect and not be lost the table must be saved to the sensor using the CFUSAV command Query CFUID lt s gt lt table number gt Returned String CFUID lt s gt lt table number gt lt identity gt CFUNITS Cal factor display units SENSOR Syntax CFUNITS lt s gt lt units gt s AorB units or PCT dB or dBm Remarks This command changes the display units of the calfactors between either dB or pecentage Note that this will also set the form the data is output over the GPIB or RS232 when requested Query CFUNITS lt s gt Returned String CFUNITS lt s gt lt units gt CFULD Cal factor table binary load SENSOR Syntax CFULD lt s gt lt table number gt lt length gt lt binary data gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type length Length of message in bytes 6 24 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS binary data Same data as that recieved by CFURD Remarks Loads binary data into the cal factor table This command will automatically save the data to the sensor CFUPT Preset cal factor table SENSOR Syntax CFUPT lt s gt lt table number gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables supporte
66. the GPIB command REF GPIB emulation mode Syntax EMUL lt mode gt mode ML24XX HP436A no Anritsu ML2430A Series native mode Hewlett Packard HP437B Hewlett Packard HP438A Hewlett Packard ML4803 Anritsu ML4803A Series ARA RA MA Remarks Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters This com mand is available in any emulation mode and resets the whole GPIB inter face when the emulation mode is changed ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS MCA MCC MCO MCQ ML2430A OM When selecting GPIB emulation modes the instrument configures itself to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated For example when selecting HP 438A emulation the front panel menus pass through the pre sets for the HP 437B which presets sensor A to dBm then selects HP 438A emulation which presets sensor A to Watts NOTE This command must be entered using the 488 2 format that is EMUL lt ws gt lt mode gt lt ws gt white space Set the cal factor value at the specified memory location in dBm Syntax MCA lt mem gt lt gt lt value gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 value Cal factor value in dBm Remarks Set the cal factor value at memory store address lt mem gt to lt value gt dBm Clears the cal factor value at the specified memory loca tion Syntax MCC lt mem gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 Remarks Clears the cal factor value at memory store
67. the actual parameters when the timing criteria is known TYPICAL SETUP A typical situation with no triggering CONTINUOUS 1 Select SYSTEM SETUP PRESET to reset the instrument to the standard de fault conditions see Appendix A Section A 3 for a listing of the system defaults 2 Connect sensor A to the signal source 3 Select SYSTEM SETUP and press MODE to select PROFILE 4 Press CLR or any other menu key to return to the display screen The display now shows a power profile of sensor A on channel 1 5 Press SYSTEM CONTROL to get access to the cursor Press lt lt and gt gt to move the selected cursor and SWAP to select the other cursor ML2430A OM 5 11 PROFILE OPERATION MODE PROCEDURES SCALING CURSOR READOUT 5 12 NOTE With a CONTINUOUS trigger such as this there will most likely not be specific points of interest so the movement of the cursors is rather arbitrary If modulation is applied to the signal or its power level al tered the signal should change on the display The signal may not be visible if it is not in the default range which covers 20 to 50 dBm In the example above if the measured power signal is not visible because the power is too high or low the scaling can be altered as follows 1 Press SYSTEM CONTROL more SCALE There are now soft keys for TOP and BOTTOM dB levels referring to the top and bottom of the screen and AUTO SCALE which will optimize the displayed graph 2
68. to 1 dBm the meter displays the final reading within 0 01dB with no delay The final settling of 0 01dB will settle over a short subsequent period of time leading to a stable high resolution readout With a HIGH setting of low level averaging the settling window is in creased up to approximately 0 05 dB and the settling time is longer With low level averaging OFF the meter displays the final reading instantly with no further settling observed Any jitter due to noise is reflected in the displayed reading which may be inconvenient for high resolution readings Example AVGLL A HIGH Query AVGLL lt S gt Returned String AVGLL lt S gt lt MODE gt AVGM Manual Averaging SENSOR Syntax AVGM lt s gt s AorB Remarks Changes the averaging of the sensor to Moving averaging mode from Auto Averaging The average number is set to the same value that the Auto averaging mode was using internally If the sensor is not presently in auto averaging mode this command is ignored BAUTS Battery Auto Turn OFF SYSTEM ML2430A OM 6 19 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Syntax BAUTS lt state gt State ENABLE or DISABLE Remarks Enable disable the battery auto power shut off NOTE Although GPIB is not available under battery operation the state of this parameter can be changed for later use Query BAUTS Returned String BAUTS lt state gt BAUTT Battery Auto shut off after x minutes SYSTEM Syn
69. whenever the limits specified for the channel have been exceeded regardless of whether the reading subsequently goes into pass or not This state remains until FAIL HOLD is turned OFF lf BEEP is ON and FAIL HOLD is OFF whenever the limits speci fied for the channel have been exceeded a single beep sounds If fail BEEP is ON and FAIL HOLD is ON whenever the limits specified for the channel have been exceeded a beep will sound once every second until FAIL HOLD is turned OFF or the CLEAR key CLR is pressed The FAIL indication is not affected by the CLEAR key and can only be cleared by turning FAIL HOLD off If a limit fail happens again the alarm will sound again 4 15 TRIGGER MENU 4 6 TRIGGER MENU 4 16 OPERATION The Trigger function in the ML2430A allows the user to define under what condi tions measurements are taken and the time period they are taken over For in stance the READOUT mode can be configured to display the average power of the ON period of a square wave or an individual slot in a GSM burst The Trigger menus are always available in PROFILE operation mode as selected from the System menu If PROFILE cannot be selected within the System Setup submenu change the GPIB mode to ML24XX in the System Rear Panel submenu In READOUT or POWER vs TIME modes the trigger setup menus are available if the channel input configuration SENSOR Setup MODE is set to CUSTOM A display channel using more than on
70. 0 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A Immunity EN50082 1 1992 Generic Immunity Standard 1EC801 2 Electrostatic Discharge 4kV CD 8kV AD JEC801 3 RF Radiated Field Immunity 3V m JEC801 4 Electrical Fast Transients 0 5kV SL 1kV PL Electrical Safety Requirement Product Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 EN61010 1 1993 anager of Corporate Quality Morgan Hill CA S SEFT 9 Date European Contact For Anritsu product EMC amp LVD information contact Anritsu LTD Rutherford Close Stevenage Herts SGI 2EF UK FAX 44 1438 740202 Table of Contents Chapter 1 General Information 1 1 Scope of This Manual 2 0 0 0 4 eee ee 1 1 1 2 JAWOGUCUON sos eses Cee he hh eG SE eS SE ES 1 1 1 3 Related Manuals 2 0000 ee ee es 1 1 1 4 Identification Number e 1 2 1 5 Power Meter Models Options and Accessories 1 2 16 SENSO ee bee edhe RP Ree ee RE SAT eS 1 3 1 4 Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 Introduction ee a bee Soa we See ee Ge ew DR we 2 1 2 2 Initial Inspection 0 0 00 ee ee 2 1 2 3 Sensor Handling o 2 1 2 4 Power Requirements o 2 1 2 5 Environmental Requirements 2 3 2 6 Rack Mounting 2 4 08 202000 2 bee ee Dee ewe we Bae 2 3 2 7 Battery Charging Removal and Replacement 2 9 2 8 Storage and Shipment 2 0200 02 2 ee
71. 0 ms Query GTGW Returned String GTGW lt val gt GTLVL Set profile trigger level TRIGGER ML2430A OM 6 47 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 48 Syntax val Remarks Related Commands Query Returned String GTLVL lt val gt 30 to 20 dBm When the system trigger in profile mode is set to either INTA or INTB in ternal sensor A or B it will trigger on a power level given by the sensor This command sets the level GTSRC GTTYP GTLVL GTLVL lt val gt GTSRC Set Profile Trigger source TRIGGER Syntax source Remarks Query Returned String GTSRC lt source gt INTA INTB EXTTTL MANUAL CONT INTA internal sensor A INTB internal sensor B EXTTTL external BNC TTL trigger input MANUAL manual push button trigger CONT continuous MANUAL trigger only functions correctly on non repetitive sampling i e the PROFILE PERIOD needs to be 6ms or greater The display shows an x marking the trigger point This trigger point mark rotates as the profile data is updated changing between x and on each data update On rapid updates the trigger point mark may appear like a star as it is rotating so quickly In manual external or GPIB triggered displays the mark rotates at a slower rate and each true data update can be seen The GTSRC setting is overridden by the Group Execute Trigger GPIB com mon command GET TRG TRO TR1 and TR2 commands T
72. 0A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS units W Watts DBM dB DBUV dBuV DBMV dBmV Remarks DBM 0dB is equal to 1mW readout mode W Watts readout mode V Volts readout mode This selection is automatically made when the channel input configuration is set to External volts EXT V DBUV dBuV OdB is equal to 1uV in readout mode Query CHUNIT lt c gt Returned String CHUNIT lt c gt lt units gt When the channel input configuration is set to External volts EXT V the returned units are always volts irrespective of what units have been set CONT Continue GPIB SETUP Syntax CONT Remarks This command will allow the system to continue the startup sequence if there are self test failures other than DSP errors Related Commands STERR START CUR Cursor in Power vs Time and Source Sweep modes SYSTEM Syntax CUR lt cursor gt lt fval gt cursor 1 or2 fval 0 0 to 1440 minutes 24 hours in Power vs Time mode In Source Sweep mode Power sweep 120 0 dB to 30 0 dB In Source Sweep mode Frequency sweep 10 0 KHz to 122 0 GHz Remarks In Power vs Time mode the fval parameter is in minutes In Source Sweep mode the fval parameter is in dB or Hz for a power sweep or frequency sweep respectivily Examples Power vs Time Set cursor 1 to 30 seconds CUR 1 0 5 Set cursor 2 to 12 5 hours CUR 2 750 Source sweep Power Sweep set cursor 1 to 11 5 dB CUR 1 11 5 Frequency Sweep set cursor
73. 11 HP 437B QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B Command Function Page GT Set group trigger 6 108 ID 6 108 IDN 6 108 KB Calibration factor 6 108 LG Set log units 6 109 LH Set high limit 6 109 LL Set low limit 6 109 LM Limits check state 6 109 LN Set linear units 6 110 OC 6 123 OD 6 110 OF 6 110 Ol Identification 6 64 6 97 6 111 6 123 OS Set offset value 6 111 PR Preset the unit 6 111 RA Auto Range 6 111 RC Recall setup 6 111 RE 6 112 RE 6 112 RH Range hold 6 112 RL Relative mode 6 113 RM Range hold set 6 113 RV Read service request mask value 6 113 SE 6 113 SM Status message 6 114 SN 6 114 ST 6 72 SV 6 115 TRO Trigger hold mode 6 76 6 115 6 126 B 12 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B HP 437B QUICK REFERENCE Command Function Page TRI Trigger immediate 6 77 6 115 6 126 TR2 Trigger with a settling delay 6 77 6 115 6 127 TR3 Trigger free run 6 78 6 116 6 127 ZE Zero sensors 6 116 6 127 ML2430A OM B 13 HP 438A QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B B 6 HP 438A QUICK The following table references HP 438A emulation mode commands REFERENCE Table B 17 HP 438A Emulation Commands Command Function Page 21D 6 117 1 6 103 AD 6 117 AP 6 118 AR 6 118 BD 6 118 BP 6 118 BR 6 118 CL Cal Adjust 6 103 CS Clear all status bytes 6 103 DA Display All 6 104 DD Display disable 6 104 DE Display enable 6 105 DR Set GPIB address 6 105 EMUL 6 120 FA Auto average 6 107 FH Average hold 6 107 FM Set av
74. 2 11 Chapter 3 Connections 3 1 Introduction 2 2 0000350000 SRE RES we es 3 1 3 2 Front Panel Connectors 0 00 8 ee eee eee 3 1 3 3 Rear Panel Connectors 0 0 0 eee ee ee ee 3 2 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation 4 1 Introduction 2 2 2 ee 4 1 4 2 Front Panel Controls 0 00002 a 4 1 4 3 Power on Procedure 0002 eee ee ee es 4 3 4 4 Sensor Menu4 5 4 5 ChannelMenu a 0 ee a 4 12 4 6 Trigger Menu4 15 4 7 System Men 0 ee 4 20 4 8 Cal ZeroMenu 2 0 a 4 34 ML2430A OM Chapter 5 Procedures Sei 5 2 5 3 5 4 39 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 NHOQUCMOM ss es sosa a ads es 5 1 Power Measurement o 5 1 Zeroing the Sensor aaou a 5 1 Sensor Calibration ecos aoa a a a a a a 5 2 Sensor Zero Cal a a 5 3 Performance Verification ao a oaoa a a a a a ee 5 4 Printer Connection ou oaoa a a a a a 5 4 GPIB Remote Operation oaoa a a a a 5 4 Serial Remote Operation a a a a 5 5 RS232 Modem Support os nu a a a a 5 6 Profile Operation Mode eee eee 5 11 Source Sweep Mode a a a a a a 5 17 Power vs Time Mode 000508 a 5 19 User Cal Factors aoao aoao a a a a a 5 19 Optimizing Readings a oa a a a 5 21 Operator Maintenance aooaa a a a a 5 25 Chapter 6 GPIB Operation 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6
75. 2430A OM can be changed without affecting the trigger conditions used in Readout mode With LINK set to ON the Profile mode trigger con ditions are used for both Profile and Readout modes In Profile mode the user can view what is being measured with the selected trigger conditions but only over a limited dynamic range as it only uses the two DC ranges of the signal channel Profile mode measurement rate is also limited by sweep speed 4 21 SYSTEM MENU NOTE With LINK set to ON Readout mode is tem porarily forced to Cus tom mode and the de fault and Mod Average modes are inhibited To use these modes de select LINK Profile NOTE PERIOD sets the x axis time NOTE This is Display Trigger Delay in Figure 4 4 4 22 FAST PRESET OPERATION With LINK readout profile trigger set to ON switching to Readout mode uses the same trigger conditions but allows the full dynamic range of the meter to be used as well as providing full GPIB speed on data acquisition When moving between Readout and Profile modes with LINK en abled the value used for sample delay is modified using the display trigger delay In Readout mode the sample delay and display trigger delay values are combined as sample delay whereas in Profile mode they are both available separately Fast recall of a saved instrument setup from one of the 10 memory locations In FAST system recall mode a s
76. 45CN m PAN HEAD 45cN m i i i POWER METER FITTED WITH RACK MOUNT TOP ML2430A AND BOTTOM COVERS Table 2 1 ML2430A 01 Rack Mount Kit Parts List Assembly Procedure 2 4 h M oO Tools Required Small Phillips screw driver Large Phillips screw driver Small Phillips torque screw driver 10cNm to 120cNm Assembly drawing ML2400A 01 RACK MOUNTED LEFT OR RIGHT OPTION Confirm the correct tools are available and the parts listed above are present Re fer to diagram on page 2 5 throughout this procedure Fit the two handles 783 1055 to front plate 49362 and the front rack bracket C37376 using 4 screws 900 795 Lay the large support bracket D41473 next to the Power Meter as per the assem bly drawing Note if the PM needs to be mounted on the left hand side of the rack simply lay the bracket on the PM s right side i e a mirror image of the assembly drawing ML2430A OM INSTALLATION RACK MOUNTING Locate the support bracket on the four PM case pillars Secure with 4 screws 905 68 and 4 washers 900 345 See max torque settings page 2 4 5 Locate the front rack mounting bracket C37276 at the front of the PM on the other side to the large support bracket with two screws 905 68 and two washers 900 345 See max torque settings page 2 4 6 Locate the rear bracket C41449 at the back of the PM on the other side to the large support bracket with two screws 905 68 and two washers 900 345 See maximum torque s
77. 5 11 5 23 6 47 6 79 6 80 GET osas a a E 6 10 GPIB 2 2 4 2 4 4 4 15 4 29 5 3 5 4 6 1 Graphics a4 s ssa aowa aose aa 4 33 5 16 ground chassis E 3 3 MOISO 2422 Si me ee ess ds 5 1 grounding ae wm aa es ee qe dir we ee we 2 3 H handle gt reses eee aoe ee 1 2 HOLD ae ee he he we A ee ss te O LA 4 6 MUMIGKY 43625 626 6b eee ee ee 2 3 2 10 icon DAM srs dass ESA DR 2 2 MOJO sussa nas amp oe Ses 4 15 identification number 1 1 3 3 initial inspection 0 8 2 1 installation 2 1 ISA eG er Poe e ee ee ee E ES 6 5 K Keypad srs Bue eee ee E eee da E 4 2 L Ce RU E E 4 2 4 26 LEVELsceeeataaeeeeee eee ene 4 18 leveling 66 we a SS ee E E ae ee A 4 32 INM ro sos eeeaeee Goo amp eZ 1 3 LIAS 4 ee ee RR eee ee Ge 4 13 4 27 LINK seek eh ee Oe aE ee E 4 20 4 26 local lockout a4 eke Kae es Ee S 5 4 6 6 Low Level Averaging 4 4 9 Index 2 M maintenance 2 0058 2 eae 5 25 Menu CalZero 2 o 4 34 Channel 4 12 4 14 0 AI E 4 5 4 11 System 2 0 2804 4 20 4 33 Tigger e s a oe we ee ee Oe ew 4 15 4 19 menu mapS 500058008 C 1 mismatch oe ae eee E ee RA 4 6 MODE cremes eee ae a eee 4 5 models 2 0 a 1 2 Modem a ss wl oe da 4 30 5 6 6 54 6 56 A 9 COMMANOS a4 2 Ge 4 4 wae ee RH Sw 5 7 compatibility amp ese de we a E
78. 8 GTTYP 6 49 GTXTTL 6 49 HLIM lt C gt 6 49 HLIMS lt C gt 6 50 HOLD 6 50 iBBLP 6 4 KEYCK 6 51 LINK 6 51 LLIM lt C gt 6 52 LLIMS lt C gt 6 52 MNMXS lt C gt 6 54 MODDEL 6 54 MODLIM 6 54 MODPH 6 55 MODPWR 6 55 MODRED 6 55 MODRNG 6 56 OBACM 6 57 OBCH lt PORT gt OBCH lt PORT gt lt C gt 6 57 ML2430A OM B 7 ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B Query Returned String Page OBDSP lt PORT gt 6 45 OBDST lt PORT gt 6 58 OBMD lt PORT gt 6 59 OBPL lt PORT gt 6 59 OBVSP lt PORT gt 6 59 OBVST lt PORT gt 6 60 OBZL 6 60 OFFFIX lt S gt 6 61 OFFTBL lt S gt 6 61 OFFTYP lt S gt 6 63 OPMD 6 65 PRNSEL 6 66 REL lt C gt 6 67 RFCAL 6 67 RGH lt S gt 6 67 RSBAUD 6 67 RSMODE 6 68 SECURE 6 68 SENMM lt S gt 6 69 SENMO 6 69 SENSTL lt S gt 6 70 SRCMOD 6 70 SRCSPFRQ 6 70 SRCSTFRQ 6 71 SRCSPPWR 6 71 SRCSTPWR 6 71 SYSLNM lt STORE NO gt 6 75 TEXT 6 76 TEXTS 6 76 TRGARM lt C gt 6 78 TRGDLY lt C gt 6 78 TRGGW lt C gt 6 79 TRGLVL lt C gt 6 79 TRGMODE 6 80 TRGSRC lt C gt 6 80 TRGTYP lt C gt 6 81 TRGXTTL lt C gt TRGXTTL lt C gt lt TYPE gt 6 81 B 8 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B ML4803A QUICK REFERENCE B 3 ML4803A QUICK The following tables reference ML4803A emulation mode commands REFERENCE Table B 14 ML4803A Emulation Mode Commands Command Function Page AVE 6 85 CAL 6 65 CCA 6 86 CDJ 6 86 COF 6 86 COS 6 86 CRF 6 86 CST 6
79. 86 DBM 6 86 DBR 6 86 EMUL 6 86 MCA 6 87 MCC 6 87 MCO 6 87 MCQ 6 87 MCR 6 88 MCT 6 88 MDI 6 88 MEN 6 88 MFG 6 88 MFM 6 88 MOF 6 88 MRF 6 89 ODT 6 89 OFF 6 90 OI 6 90 OMR 6 90 OPW 6 91 REF 6 93 RNG 6 93 SRQ 6 93 STA 6 94 WAT 6 94 ZAJ Zero the sensor 6 94 ML2430A OM B 9 HP 436A QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B B 4 HP 436A QUICK The following table references HP 436A emulation mode commands REFERENCE Table B 15 HP 436A Emulation Mode Commands Command Function Page os 6 95 ENTE 6 96 6 96 6 96 6 95 6 96 6 96 EMUL 6 96 E 6 96 6 97 Ol Identification 6 64 6 97 6 111 6 123 6 97 6 97 6 97 Zero sensor 6 97 a D O W 7 O N lt 4 B 10 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B HP 437B QUICK REFERENCE B 5 HP 437B QUICK The following table references HP 437B emulation mode commands REFERENCE Table B 16 HP 437B Emulation Commands Command Function Page CLS 6 12 6 100 ESE Event Status Byte enable 6 7 6 12 ESE Return Event status register enable mask 6 14 6 54 6 101 RST 6 102 SRE 6 102 SRE 6 102 STB 6 102 TST 6 102 1 Set SRE mask 6 103 CL Cal Adjust 6 103 CS Clear all status bytes 6 103 CT 6 104 DA Display All 6 104 DC 6 104 DD Display disable 6 104 DE Display enable 6 105 DF 6 105 DR Set GPIB address 6 105 DY 6 105 EMUL 6 105 EN 6 106 ET 6 106 EX 6 106 6 120 FH Average hold 6 107 6 121 FR Frequency of the input signal 6 107 ML2430A OM B
80. ATION HP and ML4803 emulation commands on the other hand do not have to have a space between the command header and the parameter or commas between the parameters The format for HP emulation commands is lt command header gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt The end of the command text must be terminated with either a line feed character OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Transmission State EOI or both Data input and output formats and templates referred to throughout this chapter are delimited with the less than and greater than characters lt gt Optional pa rameters and suffix characters are delimited with brackets These characters are not part of the data and are only used in this text to distinguish the data ele ments they represent All the commands which allow a level to be set as a value argument are floating point values which can use the E 0x convention or a suffix multiplier The GPIB standard units convention i e MS for milliseconds etc IEEE codes and for mats have been implemented for the suffix units and multipliers The suffix unit is always allowed but is not required and is shown in brackets where appropriate Table 6 1 lists the numeric data suffix mnemonics for the ML2430A Series Power Meter These mnemonics are used when entering numeric data with GPIB com mands use of these codes is optional Commands which are not floating point but integer are Suffix Multipliers Suffix Un
81. AUTO scale is based GRYB on the min and max of the previous sweep READOUT The supplemental data readout is displayed or removed with the GRDATA READOUT soft key The readout provides display data depending GRDRQ on the graph mode and the data hold type selected as shown below ACTIVE CURSOR gt 1 10 61 dB 2 12 63 dB AP 0 00 dB At 8 85 mS AVERAGE READING BETWEEN CURSORS gt AV 17 41dB Figure 4 6 Sample Readout Display Profile Mode Data Hold NORMAL Profile Mode Data hold NORMAL ML2430A OM 4 25 SYSTEM MENU OPERATION 1 cursor 1 reading 2 cursor 2 reading AP Power difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 At Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 AV Between cursor average if ON Data hold MIN or MAX 1 cursor 1 minimum reading or maximum if MAX mode 2 cursor 2 minimum reading or maximum if MAX mode AP Power diff between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums or maximums if MAX mode At Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums or maximums if MAX mode Data hold MIN amp MAX 1 cursor 1 MIN reading cursor 1 MAX reading Z cursor 2 MIN reading cursor 2 MAX reading At Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 Power vs Time Mode Data hold NORMAL or AVERAGE 1 cursor 1 reading 2 cursor 2 reading A P Power difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 T1 Time at cursor 1 T2 Time at cursor 2 Data hold MIN or MAX 1 cursor 1 minimum reading
82. Ah 4 29 SYSTEM MENU OPERATION NOTE Immediately after power on the estimated operating time remaining displayed may not be genuine as the battery requires a few minutes to calculate the present rate of dis charge An accurate indication will be displayed only after a few minutes of continuous operation CHARGE Available only when the instrument is being powered by AC line power or external DC power greater than 21 volts This selection starts the battery charging cycle Note that the instrument will shut down during the charging cycle and restart automatically when the charging is completed A series of 10 beeps signals completion of the charge cycle Rear Panel Controls for rear panel connections are located in the Rear Panel submenu GPIB Sets the GPIB address and emulation modes ADDRESS ADDR Set the GPIB address for the power meter The default is 13 MODE EMUL Selects the power meter emulation mode Select from ML24XX na tive HP 436A HP 437B HP 438A or ML4803A modes BUFFER BUFF lf BUFFER Enabled is TRUE default In the ML243X native mode 488 2 GPIB operation when a request for data is made the re MOTE sponse is put in an output buffer ready to be read by the controller BUFFER Enabled lf another data request is made and the previous data has not been TRUE is the default read out of the output buffer the new data is queued after the origi Use FALSE when pro nal request In this mode of opera
83. BLTIM lt val gt DCONT Set Display Contrast DISPLAY Syntax DCONT lt val gt val 1to10 Remarks One is the lightest setting ten the darkest The default is five Query DCONT 6 32 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION DCONTD DCONTU DISP DPEAK ML2430A OM ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Returned String DCONT lt val gt Set display contrast down by one DISPLAY Syntax DCONTD Remarks Make the display lighter by lowering the contrast by one level Set display contrast up by one DISPLAY Syntax DCONTU Remarks Make the display darker by increasing the contrast by one level Display On or OFF DISPLAY Syntax DISP lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks When using GPIB measurement speed can be increased by not updating the display This command turns off the display and writes REMOTE across the screen If the LOCAL soft key is pressed the system reverts to DISP ON The restrictions of this mode are 1 Min max values read via the GPIB are not updated 2 Relative operation is ignored so that the normal value is given 3 DISP will not operate when sent via RS232 Query DISP Returned String DISP lt state gt Peak meter display DISPLAY Syntax DPEAK lt mode gt mode A B A amp B OFF Remarks Turns the peak meter display on or off for each channel A Sensor A only 6 33 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION B Sensor B only A amp B Sensors A and B displayed at the same time OFF Turns the peak meter d
84. C Syntax IBBLP lt polarity gt polarity POS positive for high TTL level NEG negative for low TTL level Remarks Changes the expected polarity of the TTL Blanking input signal Query IBBLP Returned String BBLP lt polarity gt KEYCK Turn key click sound on or off SYSTEM Syntax KEYCK lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks When ON an audible annunciator produces a click corresponding to every key press Query KEYCK Returned String KEYCK lt state gt LINK Trigger linking TRIGGER Syntax ML2430A OM LINK lt state gt 6 51 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS State Remarks Query Returned String LLIM Set Low limits Syntax C val Remarks Related Commands Query Returned GPIB OPERATION ON or OFF This will link the trigger set up between Profile mode and Readout mode so that the sample delay and the gate width will agree A change to the trigger set up in either Readout or Profile system set up will affect either display mode LINK LINK lt state gt CHANNEL LLIM lt c gt lt val gt 1or2 Units Min Max dBm 99 99 99 99 dBmV 53 00 147 00 Volts 0 0 20 0 Sets the low limit The LLIMS command turns the limits on and off It is not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked against the dis played value Therefore if the limits have been set for 10 dBm LLIM 1 10 and the display units are subsequently changed from dBm to Watts the system still
85. CAL FACTOR BINARY DATA decoding ASR ade Rede ode oe SAR Ao ak ak he ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ae e ae ae hs ae ake he ae ak ak ak 3k 3k 3k ak akk akk eke As ete ae a RR ak ak EE RR RR Decode binary outputs example e This function expects the binary response from the command to be held in a global character array buffer The passed parameter decode type will be one of the global definitions GRAPH BINARY DATA I OFFSET TABLE BINARY DATA CAL FACTOR BINARY DATA e Ph de ade eo de a ea ea ea ea ea de a 2 ea de ea a a dae da ae EC ae dae ae a ae ae aee 3k ea 3K ae ae 3K e oe 3K o e a ole e o void buffer decode int decode type t int count long bm value char cptr char ch val 6 int length 1f decode type GRAPH BINARY DATA FOR OGBD MXGDB and MNGDB as ak ak ak ak ak ae ae ae ak ak e ak ak ak ak zk Decode header ak ak ak ak ak akk ak ak ae ae aie a a ae ae ake RR ae ak 3k sk e Find character cptr strtok amp buffer 0 cptr strtok NULL Get the number of characters for binary length ch val 0 cptr ch val 1 NULL count atoi amp ch val 0 Get length of binary data for loop 0 loop lt count loop ch val loop cptr y ch_val count NULL length atoi amp ch val 0 If reading in a binary graph the data will be in 1024LONG format In this format each of the graph values are held as
86. DS GPIB OPERATION OFF Set sensor offset value Syntax OFF lt value gt value Offset value to add to the sensor reading Ol Request identity Syntax OT Remarks Response lt ML4803 gt OMR Output a memory store set of data Syntax OMR lt mem gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 Remarks Output a memory store set of data The output format is as follows FREQUENCY 19 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt CAL factor 18 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt OFFSET value 18 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt REFERENCE level 19 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 5 10 15 FREQUENCY QHz lt CR gt lt LF gt CAL O dB RL OFFSET dB lt CR gt lt LF gt REFERENCE dBm lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 CHARACTER DATA QO MorG Figure 6 4 OMR Output Data Format NOTE When the ODT OMR and OPW data output commands are received simultaneously only the command which is received last is valid 6 90 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS OPW Request for channel reading Remarks Outputs measuring condition measured data and status CR and LF codes are automatically output and executed after each line of 22 ASCII characters when the OPW command is used The format of the returned data Is giros EXPONENT ALWAYS _ ALWAYS E DOOM mn eco SIGN MODE RANGE AVERAGE 5 CHARACTER DATA Figure 6 5 OPW Data Output Format The data output codes are as shown i
87. Device Computer connected directly Modem offline from phone network Sequence will be seen if remote connection established RS232 MODEM SUPPORT Character Sequence at r rS n modem status data followed by S n Modem connected through to remote com S n puter The following table lists the GPIB RS232 Modem Commands and the special se rial interface only commands Command IBYE IDCL ISPL MODDEL MODINIT MODLIM MODPH MODPWR MODRED MODRNG Parameter lt value gt lt TRUE FALSE gt lt string gt lt TRUE FALSE gt lt value gt lt TRUE FALSE gt Definition RS232 type command only allows the remote PC to instruct the power meter to tell its local modem to hang up This ensures that when communication is completed the modems at both ends of the line can be disconnected and the telephone line released RS232 type command only Clears all buffered GPIB RS232 messages waiting to be processed Clears all buffered GPIB RS232 data waiting to be output Stops any pending actions RS232 type command only Allows a GPIB type se rial poll to be requested in response to an SRQ from the power meter This will return the instrument sta tus register and clear the SRQ bit within that register The CLS command should be used to clear the rest of the register Modem redial delay time 1 to 10 minutes default 5 min Initialize connected modem Autodial enable for limits failure Phone
88. E You will see a live up date of the Current Cal Factor only if that sen sor is being used ona channel For example If you are editing the Cal Factor Frequency on Sensor B but you only have channel 1 set to A and channel 2 off you will not see the Current Cal Factor being updated NOTE User defined Cal Fac tor tables are available for applications where user supplied calibra tion points are re quired Additional cal factor frequencies can be entered in a user ta ble and used in con junction with the factory table ML2430A OM FREQ CFFRQ USE TABLE CFUSEL CFUTBL CFUUSE CFUVLD SENSOR MENU For greater accuracy calibration factors are interpolated for settings that are between the calibration factor data provided in the sensor EEPROM For example if calibration factors exist for 1 and 2 GHz then the calibration factor applied for 1 5 GHz will be a value mid way between the two Sensor linearity adjustments for temperature are also interpolated If the correction factor for 1 5 GHz at 25 C is 1 dB and for 35 C is 1 1 dB then at 30 C a value of 1 05 dB will be used Manual Set Allows manual correction of sensor data either as a percentage or a fixed dB value An input frequency is also required to allow the correct linearity correction factors to be applied V GHz Most modern synthesized sources have a rear panel BNC connec tor which outputs a voltage proportional to the sy
89. EEE 488 2 1987 Programming Reference book for more information about how to use the 488 2 commands Output Data Function GetReading ByVal channel As Integer As Single make space for the result Dim result As String result String 10 0 Set the command up Cmd O Str channel CmdLength Len Cmd Send the command to the device at address 13 default address of the power meter Call DLLsend 0 13 Cmd CmdLength NLend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Receive the data from ML2430A at address 13 Call DLLreceive 0 13 result 10 STOPend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Pass result back GetReading Val result End Function ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Get Graph Data Function GetGraphData function assumes that you have the graph display setup and that there is a global array called Graph_Data make space for the result Dim result As String result String 2048 0 set up a 2K buffer for the data to put in Set the command up Cmd OGD CmdLength Len Cmd Send the command to the device at address 13 default address of the power meter Call DLLsend 0 13 Cmd CmdLength NLend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Receive the data from ML2430A at address 13 Call DLLreceive 0 13 result 2048 STOPend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp result Left result ibcntl amp 1 Get number of elements Number of elements Val M
90. Error Request Control O Operation Complete Ea Orm No Query Error Queue not E d EA Execution Error 2 Device Dependent Error Output Queue Logical OR Standard Event Status Enable Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 s DN read by Serial Poll Service Request esBjmav 3121110 Status Byte Register Generation 4 read by STB Logical OR Vv Service Request A Enable Register 7 gt x 5 4 3 2 1 0 age Figure 6 2 IEEE 488 2 Standard Status Structures ML2430A OM 6 13 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION ESE Return Event status register enable mask GPIB 488 2 Syntax ESE Remarks Returned format lt unsigned character gt When converted to an 8 bit binary number this byte yields the bit settings of the register EBSA Event status register request GPIB 488 2 Syntax ESR Remarks Return the value of the standard event status register Afterwards the event status register are cleared The returned format is lt unsigned character gt When converted to a 8 bit binary number this byte yields the bit settings of the register IDN Request device identification GPIB 488 2 Syntax IDN Remarks Returned format lt Company name gt lt model gt lt serial gt lt firmware version gt OPC Operations complete GPIB 488 2 Syntax OPC
91. FF or EXT VOLTS it is set to A and sensor A data is output if a sensor is con nected to input A If the input configuration for display channel 1 is set to a sensor combina tion A B A B etc the configuration is left as is but only the sensor A data is output If the input configuration of display channel 1 is set to B sensor B data is output c Output from display channel 2 is set to OFF d Output is in dB only ML2430A OM 6 37 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION e Sensor OFFSETS are applied f Relative is applied if it is set to on before switching to FAST mode and if display channel 1 is configured for a single sensor and dB units g No other data output requests are processed while in FAST mode ex cept for serial poll FAST mode must be turned off for example to ask for the identity data h FAST mode will not operate when sent via RS232 FBEEP Fail Beep On Off SYSTEM Syntax FBEEP lt c gt lt state gt G ord state ON or OFF Remarks When ON causes an audio beep every time the limits for the selected channel fail lf FBEEP is ON and FHOLD is ON whenever the limits speci fied for the channel have been exceeded a beep sounds once every sec ond until FHOLD is turned OFF or the CLEAR key CLR is pressed The FAIL indication is not affected by the CLEAR key and can only be cleared by turning FHOLD off If a limit fail happens again the alarm sounds again Related Commands FHOLD Query
92. GET command 2 Trigger with delayed response to GET command The GTn command configures what the device does when it receives the GET command For example GT1 sets the GET Group Execute Trigger to perform a TR1 type trigger Related Commands TR ID Return identification string Syntax ID Remarks Returned format lt company name gt lt model gt lt firmware version gt IDN HP 437B identity request Syntax IDN Remarks Returned format lt company name gt lt model gt lt firmware version gt KB Calibration factor Syntax KB lt val gt lt terminator gt val 1 0 to 150 0 6 108 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION terminator Remarks Example LG Set log units Syntax Remarks LH Set high limit Syntax val Remarks Example LL Set low limit Syntax val Remarks Example HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS Yo PCT EN The calibration factor compensates for mismatch losses and effective effi ciency over the frequency range of the power sensor KB99 9 KB99 9PCT KB99 9EN LG Changes the display to log units dBm LH lt val gt EN 99 999 to 99 999 dBm only Sets the high limit LH30 00EN LL lt val gt EN 99 999 to 99 999 dBm only Sets the low limit LL20 00EN LM limits check state Syntax State Remarks ML2430A OM LM state gt O off or 1 on Turns limit checking on or off 6 109 HP 437B EMULATION
93. GPIB 488 2 compliant For further information about GPIB pro gramming refer to the IEEE 488 1 2 Standards documents 6 2 TYPOGRAPHIC The typographic conventions abbreviations and syntax legend used throughout CONVENTIONS this chapter to define the GPIB commands are described in Figure 6 1 CFFRQ Cal Factor Frequency value SENSOR Syntax CFFRQ lt s gt lt value gt units Indicates the Command s l Functional Group Command mnemonic s AorB ML24XXA native mode value 1 kHz to 140 GHz Forme nao Command function marks An expanded description of the command how to use the command and Command Syntax String is programming hints or restrictions Allowable values for the command argument s Related Com if any mands Commands that impact or relate to this command Example An example of the command in use Query The associated query command and returned string if any Figure 6 1 Typographic Conventions for Command Listings 6 3 DATA I O All ML24XXA native GPIB 488 2 commands that use parameters must have a FORMATS space between the command header and the first parameter and all subsequent parameters must be separated by a comma Multiple commands may be sent on the same line but must be separated by a semicolon The format for ML2430A Series native GPIB commands is lt command header gt lt space gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt ML2430A OM 6 1 DATA YO FORMATS 6 2 GPIB OPER
94. GPIB Operation Sensors must be zeroed before being calibrated The Zero Cal function completes both operations in sequence To zero and calibrate the sensor connect the sensor to the ML2430A Se ries 50 MHz 0 0 dBm reference output connector labeled CALIBRATOR When the sensor is first attached the message SENSOR x NOT ZERO ED where x A or B as appropriate is displayed Press the Cal Zero front panel key and the Zero Cal function key then se lect the appropriate sensor The message changes to SENSOR x ZERO Note that the power meter automatically switches the reference calibra tor OFF during the zeroing operation ML2430A Cal Zero Zero Cal Sensor A Sensor B Figure 5 3 Sensor Zero Cal Key Sequence If only one sensor is connected the A B selection is not displayed and the zeroing process begins immediately On successful completion of the zeroing operation the calibration process begins On successful completion of the calibration operation the buzzer sounds and the message is cleared If the sensor fails either operation the message SENSOR x ZERO fail nxnnn or Sensor x Cal fail nxnnn is displayed The hexadecimal error code nxnnn indi cates the reason for the failure The sensors can also be zeroed and calibrated using GPIB commands see Chapter 6 GPIB Operation The performance of the Power Meter s individual signal channel inputs can be verified using an Anritsu ML2419A Range Calibrator R
95. HANGE FREQuency 10kHz to 122GHz determined by fitted sensor FACTOR 150 to 0 07 1 76dB to 31 55dB DONE INSERT FREQuency ML2430A OM APPENDIX C CFUSAV CFUCT CFUPT CFUID CFCAL CFADJ AVG AVGM ML2430A OM SENSOR MENU 10kHz to 122GHz determined by fitted sensor FACTOR 150 to 0 07 1 76dB to 31 55dB DONE DELETE SAVE to sensor NO YES CLEAR table NO YES PRESET table NO YES IDENTITY up to 7 characters lt lt gt gt SELECT ENTER exit when values changed but NOT saved to sensor DISCARD CANCEL SAVE user cal FACTOR if source MANUAL only 150 to 0 07 1 76dB to 31 55dB CAL ADJUST if source MANUAL only 150 to 0 07 1 76dB to 31 55dB Averaging readout and power vs time modes SENSOR not in ML2437A C 3 SENSOR MENU APPENDIX C A B Averaging MODE Auto moving repeat off AVG Averaging NUMBER if mode MOVING or REPEAT 1 to 512 AVGLL Auto LOW LEVEL averaging Off low medium high Averaging profile and source sweep modes AVG GSWP Sensor A average NUMBER 1 to 512 AVG GSWP Sensor B average NUMBER 1 to 512 GRSWR Sweep average RESET if state ON GRAVG Between CURSOR averaging On off GRSWS Graph averaging STATE on off Offset SENSOR not in ML2437A A B OFFTYP offset TYPE off fixed table OFFFIX OFFVAL offset VALUE if type FIXED 99 99dB to 99 99dB OFFTBL OFFTBR o
96. In Power vs Time mode the delay and width can be used to alter the update rate In Readout mode CUSTOM sensor mode the value entered for DELAY is applied after a trigger event and before samples are taken Enter 0 0 to 1 0 seconds in ms or us Enter 100 ns to 7 0 seconds the default is 20 ms In Profile mode WIDTH is the gate time the system uses to perform a cursor aver age measurement The time interval is represented by the space between the left most cursor and the right most cursor Changing either cursor or the gate width value updates both the cursors and the gate width value In Readout mode this value defines the measurement gate width A measurement is presented as the average of all data taken in this gate width In Power vs Time mode the delay and width can be used to alter the update rate or sample rate When set to External TTL the power meter triggers on a TTL level rising or falling This selection sets the trigger for either a rising or falling edge Sets the trigger arming unless the trigger source is set to EXTTTL When ARMING is set to Blanking ON only samples taken when the rear panel Digital Input BNC is active will be averaged in the measurement The polarity of the rear panel Digital Input BNC sig nal can be set high or low using the System Rear Panel BNC TTL LEVEL menu setting When ARMING is set to Blanking OFF all samples are read irre spective of the level on this BNC Figure 4 3 sh
97. MANDS NOTES The GPIB command error and GPIB execution error are always enclosed within exclamation marks If no errors have been produced since the last ERRLST was read the ERRLST will end with Hl When read for the first time after startup a sensor may be reported as not fitted even though it is This is because the error condition of a sensor used in a channel configu ration was recorded before the sensor initialization was completed lf a sensor is not used in a channel configuration it will be reported as Zeroed although it may not have been If the sensor is then used in a channel configuration it s zero status will be correctly reported Related Commands ESE ESR FAST Operate in non 488 2 compliant mode GPIB SETUP Syntax FAST lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks This command allows the system for soeed purposes to send the present system readings directly to the output with no buffering at all obeying the rules sent earlier when talk addressed GPIB 488 2 rules specify that data should only be given after a request FAST mode allows data to be read without requesting it first like the HP 437 8 The following conditions and restrictions apply a REMOTE is written across the screen and no screen updates are done b Sensor data for a single sensor only can be output from display channel 1 according to the following rules If the input configuration for display channel 1 is set to either O
98. ML2430A SERIES POWER METER OPERATION MANUAL Ainritsu ANRITSU LTD EMD P N 10585 00001 RUTHERFORD CLOSE REVISION K STEVENAGE PRINTED MARCH 2000 HERTS COPYRIGHT 2000 ANRITSU SG1 2EF WARRANTY The ANRITSU product s listed on the title page is are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment ANRITSU s obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the warranty period Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to ANRITSU for warranty repairs Obligation is limited to the original purchaser ANRITSU is not liable for consequential damages LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty does not apply to ANRITSU connectors that have failed due to normal wear Also the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer unauthorized modification or misuse or operation outside of the environmental specifications of the product No other warranty is expressed or implied and the remedies provided herein are the Buyer s sole and exclusive remedies TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENTS V Connector and K Connector are registered trademarks of ANRITSU Company HP 436A HP 437B HP 438A Deskjet and HP 340 Deskjet are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated NOTICE ANRITSU Company ha
99. N Changes the display to linear units Watts Set calibrator state Syntax State Remarks OC lt state gt O OFF 1 ON For example OCO reference calibrator state set to OFF HP Identity request Syntax Remarks Set offset value Syntax val Remarks Example Preset the unit Syntax Remarks Ol The format of the returned string is lt Company name gt lt model gt lt serial gt lt firmware version gt OS lt val gt EN 99 99 to 99 99 dB Specifies the offset applied to the displayed value Values can be entered in 0 01 dB increments To set an offset of 10 13 to the displayed value OS10 13EN PR Presets the unit to the HP factory defaults This command does not effect the calibration factors stored in the sensor data tables The defaults for the HP 438A are Measurement mode Sensor A 6 123 HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION RA RC RH RL 6 124 Auto Range Syntax Remarks Recall setup Syntax val Remarks Range hold Syntax Remarks Relative mode Syntax Reference Oscillator Off Active entry channel A Measurement units Watts REL mode off Measurement parameters set for Sensor A and Sensor B Cal Factor 100 0 Cal Adj 100 0 Offset 0 00 dB RA Sets the ML2430A Series to automatically select the correct range for the measurement RC lt val gt EN 1 to 10 The ML2430A Series
100. NSOR MENU The Sensor menu has controls for sensor data processing NOTE When editing an entry in a menu pressing the CLR key clears the digits If in a menu screen pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level Selects the data acquisition controls for the sensor The following submenus are displayed SENSOR OPTION MODE SENMM Model ML2438A dual channel only Select the sensor to be con figured Toggles between Channel A and Channel B for all sub menu functions Only displayed if a Universal Power Sensor with Option 01 is con nected to selected input channel This key selects between True RMS sensor operation for WCDMA measurements and Fast CW for TDMA Pulse measurements Select either Default Modulated Average or Custom Default is the sensor mode setting following system preset It is the ML2430A Series simplest operating mode Measurement speed is automatically adjusted according to sensor response times and the user adjustable Settling Triggering controls except for GPIB trig ger are disabled when the sensor mode is set to Default This is in tended to simplify basic power measurement by avoiding the necessity of specific trigger settings Modulated Average mode is used to stabilize the front panel digital readout It is a specialized sensor mode for either MA2440A or MA2470A Series power sensors These sensors are fast enough to demodulate the amplitude modulation of many RF test signals
101. None Not supported Not supported None None OSDOEN not supported None None Limited to 10 stores None None None ML2430A ranges ML2430A OM APPENDIX B HP IB SUPPORT Mnemonic Action Supported Restrictions RV Read SRE None SM Status ouput Yes As much as has meaning for ML2430A Set to O if not used ST Limited to 10 stores 21D Return ID string Yes None NOTES The Factory cal factor table can be read by sending an F instead of the table number The HP 438 emulation mode supports the HP 437 cal factor table com mands on the ML2430A Series This allows the cal factor tables to up dated or read since the ML2430A Series supports cal factor tables ML2430A OM B 19 B 20 C 1 i NTRODUCTION C 2 SENSOR MENU Appendix C Menu Maps The ML2430A Series Power Meter is driven by five main menus Sensor Chan nel Trigger System and Cal Zero each accessed by a key on the front panel This appendix contains menu listings representing the levels of the available menus Each menu begins on the left with the front panel key for that menu with each subsequent softkey level indented from there Available choices ranges or limits are shown in italics where appropriate GPIB commands that are related to the menu selections are shown on the far left in brackets Refer to Chapter 6 GPIB Operation for information on using GPIB Note that many menu choices are conditional depending upon the meter s opera tion mode
102. OR A SENSOR B ZERO Zero On ML2438A with both sensors connected SENSOR A SENSOR B RFCAL RF OFF VZERO Ext V ML2430A OM C 15 C 16 Index A eE ERE EERE sosa 2 1 3 3 4 2 accessories power meter 1 2 SeNSor ooa a a a 1 3 Adobe nda masa e a a a 1 1 alarM oaa a wy a we 4 2 ARMING sssrsia s SER RSS E 4 17 ASGW casacos por tn Gia dana 6 3 attention 0 00 0000 00 2 eee 6 6 attenuator assa wow Re ewe a ew a 1 3 auto power off 4 2 2 4 28 Averaging 0 050 ee eee 4 8 5 12 B backlight bus eb wee ek ne De ew we 4 26 battery 1 2 2 2 2 8 2 10 4 28 Charging s sss Eca EEE ES 2 2 compartment a ss aw aw a a 2 8 conditioning 9 0 a a de E A wo x 2 9 COVEN 25 aaa da 2 8 recycling 20 cad e ss 2 9 DEEP sora ses sra a 4 14 BLANKING soso 5 16 BNG g 4 42 5 ls E 3 3 4 13 4 31 4 34 6 10 C CO ROM os sia SS 1 1 CallaciOl ositos 4 6 4 8 calibrator 3 2 3 3 4 34 5 2 6 10 C 15 CAS gt us bars aj BRE Se Bee 1 2 2 3 2 9 channel 6 10 CHARGE 43 sv e ed 4 29 charger battery 1 2 2 8 2 9 Clear Key 0 o eae 4 14 commands formats 008 4 6 1 6 3 GPIB ss a casas E e a n 6 1 HP 436 Emulation 6 96 6 100 HP 437B Emulation 6 101 6 117 HP 438A Emulation 6 118 6 128 ML2430A OM ML24XXA native mode 6 12
103. P 5V to 5V DISPlay START power 70dB to 47dB 0 to 50W 37 to 154dBuV 23 to 94dBmV DISPlay STOP power 70dB to 47dB O to 50W 37 to 154dBuV 23 to 94dBmV if mode PASS FAIL and port output 1 or output 2 CHANNEL a PASS TTL LEVEL High low if mode AC Mod Output and port output 1 ACModOUTPUT POLARITY Positive negative C 13 SYSTEM MENU OBCH OBZL IBBLP PRNSEL GRCP GRTMM GRES GRPTP SECURE C 14 if mode RF BLANKING and port output 2 CHANNEL 1 2 Output TTL during zeroing Low high if port input 1 Blanking active TTL LEVEL Low high PRINTER selection down up HP Deskjet 340 Canon BJC80 Graphics CONNECT graph points On off TRACKING min max Single infinite REF LINE On off PRE TRlgger percentage O to 100 Secure System SECURE state Off clear memory Identity APPENDIX C ML2430A OM APPENDIX C CAL ZERO MENU C 6 CAL ZERO MENU _ The Cal Zero menu establishes the 0 0 dBm reference calibration and zeroing of the sensors Refer to Chapter 5 for specific procedures NOTE The single sensor channel ML2437A will not display the Sensor B selection option shown below The Sensor B se lection will only be displayed on the dual sensor channel ML2438A when both sensors are connected Cal Zero Zero Cal On ML2438A with both sensors connected SENSOR A SENSOR B CAL Cal 0 dBm On ML2438A with both sensors connected SENS
104. PE gene eee eee eae ee ee ee ae Ge 4 10 typographic conventions 6 1 U USE TABLE 6424454662646 6 bee ee ee 4 7 UOT 2 eee ee wae Ae dass 5 1 W WARRANTY uses Ge 6 oe eee He E 1 2 MIDI 2 264 haw a bao eee ES 4 17 Z ZOO ge meme Sa ee ee 4 34 5 1 Index 3 4
105. R MODELS OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES GENERAL INFORMATION The ML2430A Series ID number is affixed to the rear panel See Figure 3 2 Please use the complete ID number when ordering parts or corre sponding with the Anritsu Customer Service department The ML2430A Series Power Meter is available with either one or two sen sor inputs and is delivered with a 1 5m sensor cable ML2400A 20 for each input Model numbers options and accessories are listed below Models Model No ML2437A ML2438A Options Model No ML2400A 01 ML2400A 03 ML2400A 05 ML2400A 06 ML2400A 07 ML2400A 08 ML2400A 09 ML2400A 11 ML2400A 12 ML2400A 13 Accessories Part No 760 206 D41310 ML2419A B41323 MA2418A Number of Sensor Channels Single Channel Dual Channel Option Rack Mount single unit Rack Mount side by side Front Bail Handle Options 01 thru 05 are mutually exclusive Rear Panel Mounted Input A Rear Panel Mounted Input A amp Reference Rear Panel Mounted Inputs A B amp Reference Rear Panel Mounted Inputs A amp B Options 06 thru 09 are mutually exclusive 3000 mA h NiMH Battery Front Panel Cover Can not be used with rack mounted units External Battery Charger Item Hard Sided Transit Case Soft Sided Carry Case with shoulder strap Range Calibrator Serial Interface Cable 50 MHz 0 dBm Reference Source ML2430A OM GENERAL SENSORS INFORMATION 1 6 SENSORS The following sensors senso
106. S COMPANY 10 Kingsbridge Road Fairfield NJ 07004 Telephone 201 227 8999 FAX 201 575 0092 AUSTRALIA ANRITSU PTY LTD Unit 3 170 Foster Road Mt Waverley VIC 3149 Australia Telephone 03 9558 8177 FAX 03 9558 8255 BRAZIL ANRITSU ELETRONICA LTD Praia de Botafogo 440 Sala 2401 CEP 22250 040 Rio de Janeiro RJ Brasil Telephone 021 527 6922 FAX 021 53 71 456 CANADA ANRITSU INSTRUMENTS LTD 215 Stafford Road Unit 102 Nepean Ontario K2H 9C1 Telephone 613 828 4090 FAX 613 828 5400 CHINA ANRITSU BEIJING SERVICE CENTER 416W Beijing Fortune Building 5 Dong San Huan Bei Lu Chao Yang Qu Beijing 1000004 China Telephone 011861065909237 FAX 011861065909236 FRANCE ANRITSU S A 9 Avenue du Quebec Zone de Courtaboeuf 91951 Les Ulis Cedex Telephone 016 44 66 546 FAX 016 44 61 065 GERMANY ANRITSU GmbH Grafenberger Allee 54 56 D 40237 Dusseldorf Germany Telephone 0211 67 97 60 FAX 0211 68 33 53 INDIA MEERA AGENCIES P LTD Head Office A 23 Hauz Khas New Delhi 110 016 Telephone 011 685 3959 FAX 011 686 6720 ISRAEL TECH CENT LTD Haarad Street No 7 Ramat Haahayal Tel Aviv 69701 Telephone 03 64 78 563 FAX 03 64 78 334 ITALY ANRITSU Sp A Roma Office Via E Vittorini 129 00144 Roma EUR Telephone 06 50 22 666 FAX 06 50 22 4252 JAPAN ANRITSU CORPORATION 1800 Onna Atsugi shi Kanagawa Prf 243 Japan Telephone 0462 23 1111 FAX 0462 25 8379 INSTALLA
107. S GPIB OPERATION Related Commands SYSLD TEXT User text command SYSTEM Syntax TEXT lt text string gt text string Text string of up to 20 characters Remarks Defines the text string that will be displayed using the TEXTS command Related Commands TEXTS Query TEXT Returned String TEXT lt text string gt TEXTS User text display command SYSTEM Syntax TEXTS lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks This command turns on or off the display of text entered using the TEXT command Up to 20 characters of user text can be displayed on the top line of the data screen for READOUT PROFILE and PWRvsTIME display modes Related Commands TEXT Query TEXTS Returned String TEXTS lt state gt TRO Trigger hold mode GPIB TRIGGER Syntax TRO Remarks Sets both channels to trigger hold mode It does not trigger until it receives a TR1 or TR2 or GET group executive trigger TRG or TR3 command If it receives a TR3 command it reverts back to the trigger mode it was in be fore the TRO command was sent If the REM line is low this command has no effect ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Related Commands TR1 TR2 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 TR1 Trigger immediate GPIB TRIGGER Syntax TR1 lt c gt c 1or2 Remarks Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB The returned reading differs depending on the
108. SS the Status Byte STB OR ed with the Service Request Enable register SRE Unlike the ESR Command this command does not clear the register afterwards LIS TE ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION Remarks Related Commands 1 Set SRE mask Syntax val Remarks Related Commands CL Cal Adjust Syntax val terminator Remarks Examples CS Syntax ML2430A OM HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS Performs a self test and returns OOO STERR l lt val gt 8 bit mask Status Byte Structure Bit O Data ready Bit 1 Cal Zero complete Bit 2 Entry Error Bit 3 Measurement error Bit 4 Over Under limit Bit 5 Event Status Register Bit 6 Request Service Bit 7 N A RV CL lt val gt lt terminator gt 50 0 to 120 0 Yo PCT EN Same as the ML24XXA native CFADJ command Sets a calibration factor to be used when performing a O dBm calibration CL98 5EN CL98 5 CL98 5PCT Clear all status bytes CS 6 103 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION CT DA DC DD 6 104 Remarks Same as the CLS command Resets all of the GPIB status registers and clears the input queue Clear the cal factor table Syntax table number Remarks Display All Syntax Remarks Duty Cycle state Syntax State Remarks Display disable Syntax Remarks Related Commands Cietable number gt Oto 9 Clears the specified cal factor tabl
109. START Sweep start frequency MHz or GHz or power dBm ISRCSTFRQ SRCSTPWR ML2430A OM OPERATION SYSTEM MENU STOP Sweep stop frequency MHz or GHz or power dBm SRCSPFRQ SRCSPPWR NOTE When the power meter is communicating with a signal source generator over the serial interface if the source fre quency power level or the frequency itself is changed the source sweep display will be updated where appropriate Control The Control menu adjusts cursor position and toggles the readout display in Pro file Power vs Time and Source Sweep modes and provides control over display scaling SWAP SWAP selects which cursor to move The presently selected cursor lt lt is defined by a triangular marker at the top of the cursor line Press gt gt the lt lt soft key to move the selected cursor left and the gt gt soft key CUR to move the selected cursor right Trigger delay and Gate Width are related to the cursor positions This feature aids in measurement of pulsed signals Changing either cursor or adjusting the Gate width value updates both the cursors and the gate width value When enabled through the System Sound CURSOR menu selec tion if a cursor is moved into an illegal space such as the edge of the screen or the end of valid data trigger point on the left of the screen a warning beep will sound SCALE Adjust the Y axis of the graph using TOP dB Value and BOTTOM GRYT dB Value parameters in the SCALE submenu
110. TION KOREA ANRITSU KOREA 901 Daeo building 26 5 Yeoido Dong Youngdeungpo Seoul Korea 150010 Telephone 02 782 7156 FAX 02 782 4590 SINGAPORE ANRITSU SINGAPORE PTE LTD 3 Shenton Way 24 03 Shenton House Singapore 068805 Telephone 226 5206 FAX 226 5207 SOUTH AFRICA ETESCSA 1st Floor Montrose Place Waterfall Park Becker Road Midrand South Africa Telephone 011 315 1366 FAX 011 315 2175 SWEDEN ANRITSU AB Box 247 S 127 25 Skarholmen Telephone 08 74 05 840 FAX 08 71 09 960 TAIWAN ANRITSU CO LTD 8F No 96 Section 3 Chien Kuo N Road Taipei Taiwan R O C Telephone 02 515 6050 FAX 02 509 5519 UNITED KINGDOM ANRITSU EUROPE LTD 200 Capability Green Luton Bedfordshire LU1 3LU England Telephone 015 82 41 88 53 FAX 015 82 31 303 ML2430A Chapter 3 Connections 3 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes physical connections to the power meter on both the front and rear panels 3 2 FRONT PANEL The front panel connectors are illustrated in Figure 3 1 Detailed descrip CONNECTORS tions of each connector follow inritsu Power Meter CALIBRATOR Figure 3 1 Model ML2430A Series Power Meter Front Panel Connectors Calibrator Connector Sensor Connector Sensor B Connector ML2438A only Calibrator This connector is a precision female N Type 50 Ohm connector that provides a 0 0 dBm Reference precision traceable 0 0 dBm 50 MHz ref
111. TION Remarks When SRQO is issued the SRQ will no long turn off and on with each reading The SRQ is set back on by the SRQ1 command or by requesting data STA Restart averaging reading WAT Sets the display channel units to Watts Remarks Turns off relative mode Relative is not available in this mode ZAJ Zero the sensor Remarks During the zero operation the zero bit in the status byte is set When the zero operation is completed the zero bit in the status byte is cleared When emulating the ML4803 the ML2430 may take longer to zero a sen sor than the ML4803 itself When performing a zero the status byte should be used to identify when zeroing is complete 6 94 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION 6 13 HP 436A EMULATION COMMANDS ML2430A OM HP 436A EMULATION COMMANDS This section provides an alphabetical listing of the commands mnemon ics used to program the Model ML2430A Series Power Meter when in HP 436A Emulation mode The emulation mode is set through the front panel SYSTEM Rear Panel GPIBJMODE menu see Chapter 4 Operation or through the GPIB command EMUL page 6 96 HP Emulation commands must not have a space between the command header and the parameter or commas between the parameters The format for HP Emulation commands is lt command header gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed charac ter OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Tran
112. TIVE COMMANDS Syntax GRPIX lt mode gt mode NORM MINMAX MIN MAX AVG Remarks Changes the type of graph displayed NORM Profiles the sensor readings vs time from the triggered point MINMAX Plots both the MIN and MAX values for each point on the graph If connect points GRCP is ON a vertical bar is drawn between the min and max points MIN Same as NORM but each point is the minimum value that point has achieved MAX Same as NORM but each point is the maximum value that point has achieved AVG This position plotted on the chart for an x axis time slot is the aver age of all the readings during that x axis time slot period and is only avail able in Power vs Time mode Query GRPIX Returned String GRPIX lt mode gt Mode can be AVG in Power vs Time mode GRPRD Profile data collection period PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRPRD lt val gt units val 100 nsto 7 seconds Remarks Sets the time the system will collect data for and scale into the profile graph after a trigger event Example GRPRD 20US sets the data collection period to 20 microseconds Query GRPRD Returned String GRPRD lt val gt GRPTP Graph Pretrigger Percentage PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRPTP lt val gt units val Oto 100 units PCT ML2430A OM 6 43 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Remarks Sets the pre trigger percentage of the profile screen The percentage of the data collection period that shows pretrigger infomation
113. TS e IEE we co CENTER INNER USE ON A HP 34401A y o FRONT ONLY IN 2 POSITIONS WHEN FITTING TO A 783 1055 ML2430A OR MF2412A HANDLE USE ALSO WITH SIDE xa C37276 piece ae RACKMOUNT SIDE BRACKET The procedure for fitting a ML2430A to a HP34401A Multimeter is as fol lows 1 Fit to the ML2430A Power Meter front brackets C37276 C37275 and rear bracket C41449 using 6 screws 905 68 and 6 washers 900 345 Do not tighten fully at this stage only enough to allow the bracket to slide to its maximum position 2 Fit the center rear bracket 49413 using 2 screws 905 63 See max torque settings page 2 6 3 Fit to the HP34401A spacer plate 49439 in 2 positions with front brack ets C37277 and 49415 using 4 screws 905 63 See max torque settings page 2 6 4 Offer up the HP34401A to the ML2430A unit ensuring the front bracket fixing holes ofboth units are in line Slide the center rear bracket 49413 forward till it makes contact with the rear face of the HP34401A 5 Gently remove the HP34401A unit and tighten the 49413 bracket fixings in its new position See max torque settings page 2 6 2 8 ML2430A OM BATTERY CHARGING REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INSTALLATION 2 BATTERY The optional ML2430A Series Power Meter battery is a 12 Volt 3000
114. The settings for the DELAY and gate WIDTH provide the points at which the measurement is triggered and read out of the cursor The other options are similar to other triggering modes 2 SYSTEM PROFILE sets up the channel 1 or 2 to be displayed and the time axis as well as the way that the data is displayed for exam ple monitoring the minimum or maximum data over time Note that in all cases the PROFILE CHANNEL selection 1 or 2 relates to a measurement channel set up in the CHANNEL menu not directly to NOTE the A or B sensors Dynamic range is lim ited in Profile mode to NOTE DC ranges only For If the DATA HOLD mode is set to display min or max data maximum dynamic as opposed to the default NORMAL the display will range measured sig continue to track the min max until the DATA HOLD mode nals need to be repeti is returned to NORMAL tive not single shot when profiling over less than 30ms width Above this single shot profiles can be mea SYSTEM CONTROL provides control over the readout and CURSORs as well as the scaling of the display From the CURSOR menu using the lt lt and gt gt arrows the positions of the readout cursors can be ad justed The cursors directly relate to the DELAY and gate WIDTH pa sured over the full dy rameters in the TRIGGER SETUP menu but allow for visual move namic range ment of the parameters on the display itself The TRIGGER SETUP menu requires direct entry of
115. ULATION COMMANDS SRQ s Status Byte This section provides an alphabetical listing of the GPIB commands mnemonics used to program the Model ML2430A Series Power Meter in ML4803A mode The emulation mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM more more Rear panel GPIBIMODE menu see Chapter 4 Operation or through the GPIB command EMUL page 6 86 All ML4803A GPIB commands that use parameters must not have a space be tween the command header and the parameter Multiple parameters must be separated by semicolons Multiple commands may be sent on the same line but must be separated by spaces The format for ML4803A GPIB commands is lt command header gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Transmission State EOI or both The ML4803A has an array of memory addresses that each hold a structure of four values Frequency Cal factor Offset and Reference The data held for an entered frequency is not automatically applied but only applied if that memory address is called The frequency value is only a reference to the operator for which the cal factor and other data is relevant These memory address sets of data are only available via the GPIB in ML4803A emulation mode The startup and default mode of operation for the ML4803A is to set an SRQ off then on again for every reading when available This has the affe
116. VLT50 VLT75 These commands are read in without errors but are ignored by the system AVE Sensor averaging setting Syntax AVE lt number gt number O Averaging OFF 9 HOLD Holds the present averaged reading 1 Average for 1 second ML2430A Repeat average number of 25 2 Average for 2 seconds ML2430A Repeat average number of 70 3 Average for 5 seconds ML2430A Repeat average number of 128 4 Average for 10 seconds ML2430A Repeat average number of 256 Remarks The ML4803A averages for a period of time The ML2430A sets the aver aging to repeat averaging for a number of readings CAL Set the user cal factor value Syntax CAL lt value gt value Cal factor value in dB ML2430A OM 6 85 ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 56 CCA CDJ COF COS CRF CST DBM DBR EMUL Clear the calfactor value to zero Perform a CAL O dBm Remarks During the cal O dBm sequence the CAL execution bit in the status byte is set When the CAL operation is completed the CAL execution bit is cleared Clear the offset value to zero Turn ON the 50 MHz O dBm RF calibrator output Clear the reference value to zero Turn OFF the 50 MHz 0 dBm RF calibrator output Sets the display channel units to dBm Sets the display channel units to dB s and takes the relative value Remarks The relative value is stored as the reference data The reference value can be independently changed with
117. Volt age Input BNC Input Range 0 to 20V Control Analog Output BNC Operating Modes Output Range Resolution Trigger Input Operating Modes GPIB Interface RS232 Parallel Printer Output APPENDIX A Operating Modes Voltage Display voltage reading on selected channel Voltage proportional to frequency for sensor calibration factor compensation Blanking Input TTL levels only Selectable positive or negative polarity Resolution 0 5 mV Adjustable voltage to frequency relationship Two outputs configurable to Log or Lin Analog Out Selectable channel adjusted for calibration factors and other power reading correction settings Pass Fail Selectable TTL High or Low Channel output Near real time analog Uncalibrated AC Modulation Output Output 1 only 5 0 to 5 0V 0 1 mV External TTL or RF Blanking IEEE 488 2 and IEC 625 Implements AH1 SH1 T6 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO and El Supports software download and GPIB commands Compatible with HP Deskjet 540 and 310 Models other 500 Series and 300 Series and later are typically com patible Also Canon BJC 80 See printer manual for DIP switch settings General Specifications General MIL T28800E Type 3 class 5 Style E ML2430A OM APPENDIX A Display Operating Tem perature Range Storage Temperature Range Moisture Power Requirements Replaceable Battery optional EMI Warrant
118. a Se ee he woe 5 8 SUDDO e s s e mg eka a ee 5 6 5 10 O OSCE e saraa ent Rew ee ee aa 4 10 options power meter 1 2 SENSO i asin e re rka s AA 1 3 P PC card setup aooaa a a a a a 6 5 PO E E E oe eee oe oe E RA 6 5 peakmeter 4 15 4 27 6 10 Performance Verification 5 4 PERIOD sas ES E aoe ER 4 21 phone nuMber 4 30 POST 24 4544 34 24565 4 54 oo 2 1 4 3 powercord 0 0028 ee nee 2 3 power requirements 2 1 2 2 PRESSE sussa eee amp oo we we na DE 4 21 Pretrigger sema ga Oe wom DA 4 19 4 33 printer senado ss 3 3 4 28 4 33 5 4 Procedures eee a 5 1 PROFILE amp oe a aa aa 4 21 5 11 5 16 6 11 ML2430A OM R rack mount ss we aww oe s He Ed da 1 2 2 7 RAM os conose Saa sas ss 4 3 range calibrator 1 2 5 4 Range Hold 4 6 4 11 READOUT sha et ane eaw ee r 4 24 5 12 RECALL saan es eae eee he eee eae 4 20 REPILINE caso seso rro sue 4 33 related manuals 040 1 1 Relative 4 13 RESET us troned o euman se 4 10 resolution 4 12 AE a ee RR Sa 2 10 RS as ces cris ose 3 3 4 30 5 5 6 68 S Safety ciar esas a 1 1 1 2 CAVE se sesos cesan EEE OBS 4 20 011 EN 4 24 5 12 Scope of the Manual 1 1 Security cs 246 nS he AE Bee 6 11 sensor accessories 0 8080880 e 1 3 adapter gee a osea
119. a true linear basis 5 17 POWER vs TIME MODE PROCEDURES System Source Sweep Data Hold can be used to select the way in which data is plotted Using Min Max variation both minimum and maximum can be shown on the display Using Max effectively provides a peak hold If the display of swept power is not what is expected check the setting of AVERAGE and the DATA HOLD mode in case it is affecting the data processing NOTE As with other graphic modes improved speed can be achieved in ATE sys tems by disabling the graphic draw function for the LCD through the menus using SYSTEM more more Graphics CONNECT Setting CONNECT to OFF displaces the line drawing between samples and improves update rate Similarly for ATE systems the READOUT should be disabled for fast est throughput as this can all be handled within the controller PC Sensor range hold is not available in this mode of operation as auto ranging is selected Using the Anritsu The ML2430A Series can be connected directly to the Anritsu 68 69000 Series 68 69000 Synthesizer Synthesized Signal Generators models 68XXXB and 69XXXA using a special RS232 cable Anritsu part number C37399 To use this remote connection the System Setup mode must be set to Source sweep and the System Rear panel RS232 mode must be set to SOURCE IF The RS232 mode can also be changed using the GPIB command RSMODE page 6 68 When set up in this manner all sweep frequency and power parameters w
120. able consists of up to 90 frequency cal factor data pairs for sensors up to 40 GHz or 110 fre quency cal factor data pairs for sensors up to 50 GHz plus a 7 character identity text string User cal factor tables are fully interpolated and can be used to apply correction for attenuators placed in front of the sensor In this situation determine the attenuation factors and use them in addition to the Factory cal factors The number of frequency cal factor data pairs in the factory defined table depends on the sensor being used The cal factor tables for a particular sensor are not maintained by the meter but are held in the sensor This means that when moving a sensor perhaps with an associated attenuator or calibration record from one meter to another the cali bration stays valid It is not necessary to re setup the new meter The first time a sensor is used with the ML2430A Series a slight delay may be experienced when the sensor is first plugged in This is caused by the firmware preparing the sensor to accept user cal factor tables After first initialization user cal factor tables will have only a single entry at 50 MHz 100 5 19 USER CAL FACTORS PROCEDURES Cal factor tables are accessed through the Sensor CalFactor USE TABLE front panel menus Chapter 4 or through GPIB commands Chapter 6 ML2430A Sensor CalFactor more USE TABLE dB EDIT Figure 5 4 Cal Factor Table Key Sequence Example Procedure Use the key
121. adout mode Related Commands GRMD Query OPMD Returned String OPMD lt mode gt PRINT Send details to the connected printer SYSTEM Syntax PRINT Remarks The type of printout depends on the operation mode currently selected In all modes the printout includes a header with the current sensor settings ML2430A OM 6 65 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 66 and measurement channel setups When in Readout mode the Channel 1 and Channel 2 values and the max min values if present are printed below the header In Profile and Power vs Time modes a graph is printed out below the header with all the details shown PRNSEL Select the type of printer SYSTEM Syntax PRNSEL lt type gt type HP340 BJC80 Remarks Available printer selections are the HP DeskJet 340 and Canon BJC80 Other 300 500 600 Series and later HP printers are typically compatible If the Canon BJC80 printer is selected it must be set to EPSON LQ emu lation mode for proper operation Refer to the printer manual for instruc tions on setting the emulation mode Query PRNSEL Returned String PRNSEL lt printer gt RCD Range Calibrator data request DATA OUTPUT Syntax RCD lt s gt s AorB Remarks Returns the results from an ML2419A Range Calibrator run after the Range Calibrator is disconnected from the power meter While still connected to the Range Calibrator the results can be printed but not read via GPIB The results include values f
122. al enable for limits failure SYSTEM ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Syntax MODLIM lt state gt value TRUE or FALSE Remarks When set to TRUE produces an SRQ and autodials the phone number set with MODPH when a channel limits failure occurs See Section 5 10 for more information on modem operation Query MODLIM Returned String MODLIM lt true gt or lt false gt MODPH Autodial phone number SYSTEM Syntax MODPH lt number text gt number text the number to be dialed Remarks Enter the phone number to be dialed when autodialing is enabled Reads in a string of up to 40 ASCII characters or the end of the message When the number is being dialed a dot will be interpreted as a 2 second delay in the dialing sequence a minus sign will be interpreted as wait for an other dialing tone See Section 5 10 for more information on modem oper ation Query MODPH Returned String MODPH lt number text gt MODPWR _ Autodial enable for power on SYSTEM Syntax MODPWR lt state gt value TRUE or FALSE Remarks When set to TRUE produces an SRQ and autodials the phone number set with MODPH when the ML2430A is powered on See Section 5 10 for more information on modem operation Query MODPWR Returned String MODPWR lt true gt or lt false gt MODRED Redial count SYSTEM ML2430A OM 6 55 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Syntax MODRED lt count gt count Oto 10
123. any further occurrence of the listed events The ERRLST response is ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PPPPPP QQQQQQ A Sensor A Zero state 0 ZERO done 1 Not done 2 Zero failed HP error 01 B Sensor B Zero state O ZERO done 1 Not done 2 Zero failed HP error 02 C Sensor A CAL state 0 Done 1 Failed HP error 05 D Sensor B CAL state 0 Done 1 Failed HP error 06 E Sensor A range hold 0 OK 1 Over range 2 Under range HP er ror 17 F Sensor B range hold O OK 1 Over range 2 Under range HP er ror 18 G Display channel 1 reading out of range O OK 1 Over range 2 Under range HP error 25 H Display channel 2 reading out of range O OK 1 Over range 2 Un der range HP error 25 Display channel 1 illegal log operation O OK 1 Error HP error 27 J Display channel 2 illegal log operation O OK 1 Error HP error 27 K Printer error O OK 1 Print error 2 Buffer full 3 Paper out L Sensor A fitted and used state O Fitted 1 Not fitted and used M Sensor B fitted and used state O Fitted 1 Not fitted and used N Display channel 1 limits state O Passed 1 High limit failed 2 Low limit failed O Display channel 2 limits state O Passed 1 High limit failed 2 Low limit failed PPPPPP Last cause of a GPIB command error 000000 Last cause of a GPIB execution error ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COM
124. at whenever AC power is applied the power meter defaults to the ON state Subsequently the instrument can be switched between the ON state and the STANDBY state using this front panel Power On Off key When External or Internal battery DC power is first applied to the instrument no AC present the power meter defaults to the STANDBY state It can then be switched to the ON state using the front panel Power On Off key Figure 4 1 ML2430A Series Front Panel Controls 4 2 Anritsu ML2438A Power Meter ED D D D Ey E EDIEDIED D D D ON OFF aR Clear Key The clear CLR key performs various functions depending on when it is pressed For example when editing an entry in a menu pressing the CLR key clears the digits If in a menu screen pressing the CLR key returns to the pre vious menu level If the limits FAIL indicator HOLD audible alarm is sounding pressing the CLR key stops the alarm The FAIL indication is not affected by the clear key and can only be cleared by turning fail hold off If the GPIB box is on the screen and the system is not in a menu screen and the system is in local mode menus available and no GPIB operations are pending then pressing the CLR key clears the GPIB box off the screen Soft Keys Soft keys select submenus toggle selections control cursor position and allow data entry A flashing cursor indicates when numbers can be entered using the numeric key
125. ate On off Fail indicator HOLD On off Fail BEEP control On off CHANNEL MENU C 7 TRIGGER MENU C 4 TRIGGER MENU Trigger Setup TRGMODE TRGSRC GTSRC TRGDLY GTDLY TRGGW GTGW TRGARM GTARM APPENDIX C The Trigger menus are always available in PROFILE operation mode as selected from the System menu In READOUT and POWER vs TIME modes the trigger setup menus are available if a sensor used on a display channel has its SENSOR Setup MODE set to CUSTOM In READOUT mode the trigger setup menus are available if the mode is set to Int A Int B ML2438A only EXTTTL Manual or Continuous only available if a sensor used on a display channel is in custom measurement mode and system setup mode READOUT or Power vs TIME or if system setup mode PROFILE or link readout profile trigger ON channels only available if ON CHANNEL only available if system setup mode Readout or Power vs Time both with link triggers OFF 1 2 1 amp 2 SOURCE int B not available in ML2437A Continuous int A int B EXT TTL manual Sample DELAY 0 to 1 second Sample gate WIDTH 100ns to 7 seconds Trigger ARMING if SOURCE continuous or internal A or internal B on ML2438A or manual Blanking ON blanking OFF TRGTYP GTTYP Trigger TYPE and level menu if source internal A or internal B on ML2438A Trigger TYPE Rise fall TRGLVL GTLVL Trigger LEVEL 30 dB to 20 dB
126. ate gt s AorB state ON or OFF Remarks Turns on or off the duty cycle for the selected sensor Related Commands DUTY Query DUTYS lt s gt Returned String DUTYS lt s gt lt state gt EMUL GPIB emulation mode GPIB SETUP Syntax EMUL lt mode gt mode ML24XX Anritsu ML2430A Series native mode HP436A Hewlett Packard HP437B Hewlett Packard HP438A Hewlett Packard ML4803 Anritsu ML4803A Series Remarks Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters This com ML2430A OM mand is available in any emulation mode and resets the whole GPIB inter face when the emulation mode is changed When selecting GPIB emulation modes the instrument configures itself to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated For example when selecting HP 438A emulation the front panel menus pass through the pre sets for the HP 437B which presets sensor A to dBm then selects HP 438A emulation which presets sensor A to Watts 6 35 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 36 ENTERR Entry Error beep Syntax ENTERR lt state gt State ON or OFF Remarks Turns the user entry error warning beep On or Off Query ENTERR Returned String ENTERR lt state gt ERRLST Returns the DDE error list DATA OUTPUT Syntax ERRLST Remarks On detecting a DDE event this command returns the error list giving the state of the DDE causes When the error list is read all parts of the list are cleared and will be updated by
127. ated frequencies and offsets Select an entry and enter the frequency and offset using the keypad CLEAR OFFCLR When an offset table is selected CLEAR will set all of the table s elements to zero Applies a duty cycle to the selected sensor An offset will be applied based on the entered value SENSOR STATE DUTYS DUTY DUTYS Model ML2438A dual channel only Used to select the sensor to be configured Toggles between sensor A and sensor B for all sub menu functions ON or OFF Delete Enter or Cancel An offset will be applied based on the en tered value For example specifying a duty cycle of 50 will alter the displayed readings by approximately 3 01 dB This function will toggle the sensor between holding the present operating range and Auto Ranging Auto Ranging automatically selects the best range to take the measurement If either sensor is auto ranging this key will force both sensors to hold their pres ent operating ranges If either sensor is held within an operation range this key will force both sensors to Auto Range ML2430A OM OPERATION 4 5 CHANNEL MENU Setup NOTE Use MIN MAX to track variations in a mea surement over time or while adjusting exter nal devices or tuning over frequency ML2430A OM CHANNEL MENU The Channel menu controls the operation of a display channel There are two display channels Channel 1 and Channel 2 Channel 1 appears at the top of the
128. ay channel 1 or 2 or 1 amp 2 when setting trigger condi TRGMODE tions in Readout or Power vs Time modes SOURCE The trigger sources are CONTINUOUS Internal A Internal B TRGSRC ML2438A only EXTTTL or MANUAL When the trigger source is GTSRC set to INT A or INT B Internal A or B the power meter triggers on a rising or falling power level on the associated sensor See LEVEL for the setting of the trigger power level 4 17 TRIGGER MENU NOTE The averaging function averages a number of gate WIDTHS so for a given averaging num ber larger WIDTHS will take longer to AVER AGE Narrower widths will average faster but may yield aless settled measurement NOTE Use Arming to synchro nize to other equipment or modulation burst synchronization This is a simple way to inhibit measurements during user defined pe riods without entering actual time periods 4 18 DELAY TRGDLY GTDLY WIDTH ITRGGW GTGW EDGE TRGXTTL GTXTTL ARMING TRGARM GTARM OPERATION In Profile mode DELAY sets the time delay after the display trigger delay to when the system starts to take and display readings rep resented by the left most cursor Enter 0 0 to 1 0 seconds in ms or us NOTE Changing the left most cursor or the trigger delay time up dates the cursor or the delay time value accordingly In Pro file mode moving the cursor only allows updates to the pixel resolution of the display
129. being used by the selected sensor Possible returned values are O factory default table 1 to 10 user table being used 11 to 20 factory table user table being used CFUVLD Valid cal factor table check SENSOR Syntax CFUVLD lt s gt lt table number gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type Remarks Returns a TRUE if the table number passed is a valid initialized table for the selected sensor Returns a FALSE if it is not CFVAL Current cal factor value SENSOR Syntax CFVAL lt s gt s AorB Remarks Returns the cal factor value currently being used for the specified sensor This will be a fixed value only when in MANUAL cal factor mode otherwise the value will depend on the frequency entered when cal source is FREQUENCY and the scaled frequency when the cal source is V GHz CFVAL will not return the updated Cal Factor Value if the system is in TRO Trigger Hold mode That is if you change the Cal Factor Frequency and want to read back what the unit has set the Cal Factor to when the system is in TRO mode the system will return the last Cal Factor value before you went into TRO mode Also you may have to wait for approximately 0 25 seconds after you change the Cal Factor Frequency to read back the Cal Factor Value even when not in TRO as CFVAL is not updated instantly after you change the Cal Factor Frequency This restriction only applies to the CFVAL GPIB command and does not
130. can store up to 10 instrument configurations for con venient recall The configuration parameters stored are the same parame ters the ML2430A Series stores in its own SAV and RCL commands Therefore RC is equivalent to RCL and ST is equivalent to SAV Selecting Register O always restores the previous power meter configura tion providing an expedient way to recover from an entry error RH Hold the power meter in the current range The differences in sensor ranges must be taken into account when the ML2430 is being used to em ulate the HP 438 RL lt mode gt ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS mode O 4 2 Remarks Relative mode permits any measurement result to be compared in dB or percent to a reference value Relative mode can be enabled using the cur rent power reading RL1 or the previous reference level RL2 Successive measurements are displayed relative to this reference value RLO disables relative mode RM Range hold set Syntax RM lt val gt EN val Oto5 Remarks Set the range to lt val gt and then sets range hold A value of O selects Auto Ranging where the range will change to take the best measurement auto matically Example To set the range to 3 RMSEN Related Commands RH RV Service request mask value Syntax RV Remarks Read service request mask value The returned string format is lt integer value gt Converting the integer value into an 8 bit binary numb
131. ce CALIBRATION Syntax CAL lt s gt s AorB Remarks Performs a OdBm calibration when the sensor is attached to the reference O dBm source on the ML2430A Series or another O dBm reference source If the calibration fails the execution error bit in the Event Status Register is set CFADJ Cal Adjust SENSOR Syntax CFADJ lt s gt lt units gt lt val gt s AorB units PCT DB or DBM val 07to 150 31 55 to 1 76dB Remarks Sets a calibration factor to be used when performing a O dBm calibration and the calibration factor source is set to Manual This value is the only factor applied when performing a O dBm calibration If the sensor calibra tion factor source is set to V GHz or Frequency the sensor internal EE PROM correction value at 50 MHz is used Examples CFADJA 99 Sets the calibration factor to 99 for sensor A CFADJ A DB 0 2 Sets the calibration factor to 0 2dB for sensor A Query CFADJ lt s gt Returned String CFADJ lt s gt lt units gt lt val gt CFCAL Cal factor manual setting SENSOR Syntax CFCAL lt s gt lt units gt lt val gt s AorB units PCT DB or DBM ML2430A OM 6 21 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS n val Remarks Example Query Returned String CFFRQ Syntax S value Remarks Examples Query Returned String CFSRC Syntax S source Remarks 6 22 Cal Factor Frequency value Cal factor source
132. ck Reference B 10 HP 437B Quick Reference o B 11 HP 438A Quick Reference 0G B 14 HP IB Support 2 20 eee we be e Rm a B 16 Introduction C 1 Sensor Menu s44584 4688 we ee ER Ow eee ERR a C 1 ChannheliMens ssa eos 4 ee ow He C 6 Trigger Menu 2 e C 8 System Menu cpa ew a C 9 CalZero Messi is ee eee ee meee ewe SEH C 15 11 10 Chapter 1 General Information 1 1 SCOPE OF THIS This manual provides installation and operation information for the Model MANUAL ML2430A Series of ANRITSU Power Meters Figure 1 1 Figure 1 1 ML2430A Series Power Meters 1 2 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides information to familiarize the user with the basic ML2430A Series Power Meter Included is information about the equip ment identification number models options and sensors 1 3 RELATED This manual is one of a two manual set consisting of this Operation Man MANUALS ual and the ML2430A Series Maintenance Manual Anritsu part number 10585 00003 These manuals are available on CD ROM as Adobe Acrobat pdf files The files can be viewed using Acrobat Reader M a freeware pro gram provided on the CD ROM For price and availability contact the nearest Anritsu Customer Service Center or visit our web site at www global anritsu com ML2430A OM 1 1 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 1 4 1 5 1 2 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER POWER METE
133. ck light mode ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS CVSPF CVSTF CVSTV CVSPV lt S gt CVSPV lt s gt lt val gt CVSTF s gt lt val gt units AorB 10 kHz to 122 GHz Sets the start frequency of the V GHZ calibration factor settings CVSPV CVSPF CVSTV CVSTF lt s gt CVSTF lt s gt lt val gt CVSTV lt s gt lt val gt units AorB 0 5 to 20 5 Sets the start voltage of the V GHz calibration factor settings CVSPV CVSPF CVSTF CVSTV lt S gt CVSTV lt s gt lt val gt DBLGHT lt mode gt ON OFF TIMED 6 31 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Remarks Sets the mode of the LCD backlight when under Battery power ON back light is ON all the time OFF back light is OFF all the time TIMED back light is on for a limited time period set by the DBLTIM com mand NOTE Although GPIB is not available under battery operation the state of this battery specific parameter can be changed through this GPIB command Related Commands DBLTIM Query DBLGHT Returned String DBLGHT lt mode gt DBLTIM Auto Backlight OFF timer setting SYSTEM Syntax DBLTIM lt val gt val 1 0to 100 0 minutes Remarks Sets the time limit when the backlight will turn off if the DBLGHT setting is set to TIMED NOTE Although GPIB is not available under battery operation the state of this battery specific parameter can be changed through this GPIB command Query DBLTIM Returned String D
134. creen pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level ML2430A OM OPERATION NOTE External trigger is only effective at 800 KHz or lower Setup NOTE Simultaneous trigger channels guarantee identical sampling for both channels essen tial for accurate ratio A B measurements ML2430A OM TRIGGER MENU The trigger icons appear as shown in Figure 4 2 Modulated Average MOD Continuous Manual Rising Edge Falling Edge INT Internal A A INT A INT INT Internal B B B TTL TT External Figure 4 2 Trigger Icons Only when a channel input configuration includes a sensor with a measurement mode that requires an icon will an icon be displayed This menu is used to set up the trigger conditions for the display channels In readout display mode with sensor mode set to custom the trigger can be set to display channel 1 and 2 separately or together as channel 1 amp 2 The channels are triggered simultaneously if the trigger conditions are setto 1 amp 2 This guarantees the trigger conditions are the same and therefore the read ings are taken at the same time In Readout and Power vs Time modes if the menu is exited with the trigger selection at channel 1 amp 2 this setup is used for trigger control Otherwise if the trigger setup display is left with channel 1 or channel 2 displayed the individual trigger settings are used for trigger control CHANNEL Select displ
135. ct of pulsing the SRQ line very quickly and would make it very difficult to use the ML4803A with other devices on the GPIB bus that wish to communicate via SRQ s These SRQ s can be turned off temporarily by the SRQO command The SRQs will start again as soon as any data is requested from the ML4803A The following table and diagram define the Status Byte Bit O Zero execution Bit set during zeroing When zeroing is complete the bit is cleared and the ODR bit and RQS bits are reset Bit 1 Cal execution Bit is set during the Cal O dBm Bit 3 Output data ready ODR bit is cleared and set for every reading when made This is done in sync with the RQS bit giving an SRQ Bit 5 Command error Set on receiving an unrecognized command The bit is cleared by reading the status byte Bit 6 RQS bit Indicates that the device is requiring service SRQ ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Zero execution Cal execution Output data ready Command error RQS bit Output Requests There are three commands to request output from the ML4803A OPW for a reading ODT for the cal factor offset and reference values and OMR for mem ory store settings If these output requests are received simultaneously only the data for the command received last will be available Unsupported The following ML4803A commands are not supported in the ML2430A Series Commands Power Meter GPIB interface PCT VSW RDB DBV50 DBV75
136. d by the sensor type Remarks Presets the cal factor table to the factory settings The preset table is auto matically saved to the sensor For a universal sensor separate cal factor tables exist for option 1 when fitted and normal operation This function will preset the table relating to the currently selected mode CFURD Cal factor table binary read SENSOR Syntax CFURD lt s gt lt table number gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type F for the factory default table Remarks This command outputs the cal factor table in binary mode in the following form CFURD lt space gt lt length of binary data gt lt binary data gt lt length of binary data gt Total length of the binary data message in bytes after the comma lt binary data gt Made up of a 8 bytes 7 for the identity plus a NULL terminator b 2 bytes representing the number of table pair entries c The cal factor table data in binary form The binary data is output in en tries which are frequency factor pairs of six bytes The frequency is held in 32768e 6LONG format and the cal factor in 1024INT format To convert these into real numbers the first four bytes of an entry are read into a LONG variable cast to a float and then divided by 32768e 6 to give a frequency The last two bytes are then read into the low bytes of a LONG then cast to a float and divided by 1024 The C programming ex ample Binary output decodin
137. e measurements and output data T Trigger with settling Remarks Triggers a new series of readings enough to update the internal digital fil ter for a noise free reading at the current power level The value is then re turned on the GPIB and returns to standby mode H V Free run mode with settling Remarks Sets the ML2430A Series back into free run mode to continuously take measurements and output data after running a settling routine Z Zero sensor Remarks Zero out the noise from the sensor When zeroing the ML2430 in HP 436 emulation mode the Z1T sequence followed by the 9 DI described in the HP 436 manual must be followed ML2430A OM 6 97 HP 436A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Output Format 6 98 The output data format for the HP 436A emulation mode is shown below Sign of Measured Measured Value Decimal Value Range space or Point Multiplier 19 2 ONES AA Number 011 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 10 11 CRLF tm pen Status Mode Measured Exponent Value 2 digits 4 digits Figure 6 7 HP 436A Ouput Data Format Table 6 2 next page describes the HPIB output data format ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 436A EMULATION COMMANDS Table 6 2 HPIB Output Data Format Definition Character STATUS ASCII Decimal Measured value valid P 80 Watts mode under range Q 81 Over range R 82 Under range dBm or dB Rel mode S 83 Power Sensor Auto Zero loop enabled range 1 under range T 84 Power Se
138. e System Rear Panel BNC TTL LEVEL menu setting When ARMING is set to Blanking OFF all samples are read 4 In the SYSTEM more more GRAPHICS menu there are options for 5 15 SOURCE SWEEP MODE PROCEDURES 5 12 SOURCE SWEEP 5 16 MODE a CONNECT points With this ON default the data points are connected with vectors to resemble a real time trace When OFF the data points are displayed as data points only with no connecting line This can give a faster display update however it may be confusing as near vertical lines will have very few points de fined within them b If Tracking min max is selected for the CHANNEL being used for the PROFILE it is possible to configure the tracking min max to display the min and max values for all the data BETWEEN THE CURSORS This provides easy ac cess to peak values within a time window for example the top of a pulse When set to SINGLE it is updated EACH SWEEP and reflects the min and max values only within that sweep When set to INFINITE it maintains the min max from the point it is started until it is reset updating the MAX if it sees a HIGHER measurement within the CURSOR window and updating the MIN readout if or when it sees a lower value than that which it has already This option in the SYSTEM menu is only a prefer ences option and not the main control for the feature The control for the min max remains in the CHANNEL menu CHANNEL SETUP more MIN MAX RESET The user
139. e cleared The returned format is lt unsigned character gt When converted to a 8 bit binary number this byte yields the bit settings of the register 6 101 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION RST SRE SRE STB TST 6 102 Reset Device Syntax Remarks RST Resets the ML2430A Series to the default configuration see Appendix A Section A 3 or see the HP manual when in HP 437B emulation mode Offset tables are not cleared The GPIB ADDRess and EMULation settings are not changed and the input queue output queue and status registers on the GPIB are not cleared This command produces the same result as the front panel key sequence System Setup PRESET RESET Setup service request enable register Syntax val Remarks SRE lt val gt 8 bit mask Sets the Service request enable register bits Return Service Request Enable register Syntax Remarks SRE Returns the Service Request Enable register Return Status Byte register Syntax Remarks Self Test Syntax o TE Returns the status byte value with bit 6 replaced with the MSS value MSS is the GPIB Master Summary Status and indicates that the device has at least one reason for requesting service Although the MSS message is sent in bit position 6 of the device s response to the STB query it is not sent in response to a serial poll and should not be considered part of the IEEE 488 1 2 status byte M
140. e gt parameter is not being sent See the last example below Examples AVGA AUTO Change Sensor A to Auto Averaging note following comma to indicate the lt val gt parameter is not being sent AVG A AUTO 64 Change Sensor A to AUTO and the User Average Number to 64 AVG A MOV 32 Change sensor A to MOVing average and the User Average number to 32 AVG A RPT Change sensor A to RePeaT average and keep the User Average number as 32 AVG A 128 Change sensor A User Average number to 128 but keep the previously set averaging mode note comma to indicate the lt mode gt parameter is not being sent Query AVG lt S gt Returned String AVG lt S gt lt MODE gt lt VAL gt 6 18 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS AVGLL Auto low level averaging SENSOR Syntax AVGLL lt s gt lt mode gt s AorB mode OFF LOW MEDIUM HIGH Remarks Sets the low level averaging window for the sensor At resolution settings of 0 01 and 0 001dB digital readouts may flicker due to the high reading rate of the ML2430A Series Low level averaging applies a low pass filter to post average data readings to achieve a more stable front panel display without slowing down the response of the meter to larger changes in level The three windows for LOW MEDIUM and HIGH low level averaging are 0 01 0 02 and 0 05 dB For example When a LOW setting of low level averaging is applied while stepping from O dBm
141. e made directly available on the rear panel BNC connector This feature is only available as a NON DRAWN option It can be selected from the System Rear Panel BNC menu PORT 1 for sensor A and PORT 2 for sen sor B Leveling A 1 selects range 1 on sensor A If the hardware is not available O volts will be set on the appropriate output when selected For signal levels below 25 dBm on a diode sensor the leveling outputs will not be valid as the signal channel operates in chopping mode below this level Printer PRNSEL TTL LEVEL Input port 7 only When in Readout or Pwr vs Time operation mode this selects the blanking input type HIGH active or LOW active you are providing The blanking input will be used if the Trigger Setup ARMING is set to Blanking ON and the Sensor Setup Mode is set to Custom When in Profile operation Mode the blanking input is ignored When in Source Sweep operation Mode if the Blanking input is set to HIGH the ML24xxA uses the digital input to sync to Your sweeper must provide a Sequential Sync output which is connected to the digital input of the meter If Blanking input is set to LOW the ML24xxA does not use the digi tal input and therefore can be connected to a sweeper which does not provide a Sequential Sync output The ML24xxA will use the Horizontal Ramp input only Configures the rear panel printer port Select from the listed com patible printers which include but are not limited to the
142. e same as a MODULATED POWER AVERAGE measurement 4 As well as the CURSOR readouts described above the POWER AVERAGE method can be used to display the average power between the two cursors This is performed as a TRUE AVERAGE and is the actual average of all the data points between and including the cursors By placing the cursors on the top of a pulse the flat top power can be measured By placing the cursors with a period of the pulse the average power of the pulse is calculated This is more accurate than a simple duty cycle calculation which makes assumptions about the pulse shape Use the SENSOR AVERAGE menu to enable this readout method NOTE The display resolution is 200 pixels Consider this effect on the resolution of timing data For example a 1 millisecond PROFILE window would have a cursor resolu tion on the display of 5 microseconds The LIMITS test functions on PROFILE data and can be configured to BEEP on fail conditions The other aspects of triggering allow for fine tuning of the trigger conditions This includes 1 Selection of HIGH or LOW going edge in External TTL 2 Level setting on Internal A or B trigger as well as polarity HIGH or LOW going 3 ARMING via an External BLANKING input When ARMING is set to Blanking ON only samples taken when the rear panel Digital Inout BNC is active will be averaged in the measurement The polarity of the rear panel Digital Input BNC signal can be set high or low using th
143. e sensor A B for example where either sen sor is in CUSTOM mode is assumed to be in custom mode and can use trigger ing Trigger setup is available only for the display channels that meet the above criteria In PROFILE mode the display shows an x marking the trigger point plus the dis play trigger delay time updated for each new set of data This trigger point mark rotates as the profile data is updated changing between x and on each data update On rapid updates the trigger point mark may appear like a star x as it is rotating so quickly In manual external or GPIB triggered displays the mark ro tates at a slower rate and each true data update can be seen This point can be moved across the x axis by the pre trigger percentage If the trigger source is either default mod average or custom continuous the trigger point has no meaning since the system is continuously triggering The mark does not appear in the Power vs Time or Source Sweep modes as it is not applicable Trigger icons indicate the type of triggering selected and appear level with the re lated channel on the far left of the screen Trigger icons are not displayed if the system is in Profile Power vs Time or Source Sweep operation modes if all sensors used in a channel input configuration are in the DEFAULT measurement mode or if the peakmeter is displayed NOTE When editing an entry in a menu pressing the CLR key clears the digits If in a menu s
144. e to a single 50mhz entry at 100 Since the ML2430A stores the cal factor table information in the sensor this data must be saved to the sensor by using the EX command or an additional command SV or the data could be lost The saving of the cal factor table data to the sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a particular table DA Turns on all the segments of the display to verify proper operation The dis play is returned to normal when another command is sent DC lt state gt 0 OFF 1 0N Turns on or off application of the duty cycle to the sensor data DD Turns the display off to allow faster measurements to be taken DE DF ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION DE DF DR DY EMUL ML2430A OM display enable Syntax Remarks Related Commands Display disable Syntax Remarks Related Commands HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS DE Return the display to normal operation after the display has been set in DD mode DD DF DF Turns the display off to allow faster measurements to be taken DD DE Set GPIB address Syntax val terminator Remarks Duty Cycle Syntax val terminator Remarks DR lt val gt lt terminator gt 1 to 30 EN Changes the device address The power meter default address is 13 DY lt val gt lt terminator gt duty cycle value in percent PCT or EN Sets the duty cycle to be applied to the input signal GPIB em
145. easured value is too large or small for the range selected Range Hold is selected for Sensor B but the measured value is too large or small for the range selected Channel 1 display value is greater than 99 999 dBm or less than 99 999 dBm Channel 2 display value is greater than 99 999 dBm or less than 99 999 dBm Combination of sensor values results in an illegal calculation Combination of sensor values results in an illegal calculation Sensor A Cal 0 failed xxxx error code Sensor A Cal 0 dBm failed Sensor B Cal 0 failed xxxx error code Sensor B Cal 0 dBm failed as per message ZERO in progress ZERO failed xxxx 4 digit code as per message ZERO in progress ZERO failed xxxx 4 digit code A 11 SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES Error Message SENSOR A not fitted READING SENSOR A data SENSOR B not fitted READING SENSOR B data Printer buffer full Printer Check paper Printer Error Chan 1 NO trigger Chan 2 NO trigger Increase PERIOD to gt 6 ms Graph Display HELD Updating SENSOR data Graph Channel Off Ext Volts ZERO in progress Put sensor number limit Sensor A cal factor error Sensor B cal factor error PUT current mode limit Internal error P6 Internal error P10 Internal error P20 Internal error P21 Internal error P22 Internal error P23 APPENDIX A Meaning Sensor A is required for the current measurement but is not fitted as per message
146. ector ea ground when operating from battery power Serial control and data output commands are Sines entered using the same format as the GPIB in pes terface Refer to Section 5 9 for more informa LA D DO NOT OPERATE tion on using Serial Remote Operation Allows E OOOO 40VA MAX POWER CORD DC Power Supply Input communication with an Anritsu 68 69000 series Used for 12 24 VDC input in the absence of AC synthesizer in Source Sweep mode Also allows CHIB AIEEE 99 service access for software upgrades etc The hardware handshake lines RTS and CTS are used to control the flow of data Sensor Connectors CALIBRATOR Alternate Sensor input connec tors for Channels A and B If the rear panel optional connectors are installed the front panel connectors are not installed Output 1 T 1 OUTPUT 2 INPUT 1 o 2 AAA line power The optional battery can be fast charged when the DC input voltage is greater gt than or equal to 21V and all other functions are 12 24V DC off Fast charge must be selected from the Sys RS a NE tem menu The external DC Power Supply input N SEE M NUAL FOR VOLTAGE RANGES ON BNC CONNECTORS line is protected by an internal fuse Output 2 Multi purpose BNC connec tor is user configurable for Multi purpose BNC connector is user Analog Output 2 volts units configurable for Modulation Output Blanking Zero TTL or Lim Multi purpose BNC con TTL Analog Output 1 volts units its Pass Fa
147. ed together can then be loaded and se cured in the rack position desired This assembly procedure also provides assem bly instructions for fitting a ML2430A to a HP34401A Multimeter and a MF2412A Microwave Frequency Counter The required parts and tools are listed below Quantity each Anritsu Part Max Torque Number Setting HANDLE PULL CHASSIS PLASTIC 783 1055 HARDWARE M3X8 POS SST PATCHLOCK SCREW MET 905 68 Albf in RIC PAN HEAD 45CN m M3X6 POS SST PATCHLOCK SCREW MET 905 69 RIC FLAT HEAD POWER METER FITTED WITH RACK MOUNT TOP Description NO mb ah o IP IRIS E Eb AININIJ FA NINI a DD Ajo Table 2 2 ML2430A 03 Rack Mount Kit Parts List 2 6 ML2430A OM INSTALLATION Assembly Procedure ML2430A OM 1 RACK MOUNTING Tools Required 1 Small Phillips screw driver 1 Large Phillips screw driver 1 Small Phillips torque screw driver 10cNm to 120cNm 1 Assembly drawing ML2400 03 SIDE BY SIDE OPTION Confirm the correct tools are available and the parts listed above are present Re fer to diagram on page 2 8 throughout this procedure On the two sides of the power meter to be joined together fit the two rear brack ets 49413 C37279 and two front brackets C37275 C37277 using 8 screws 905 68 and 8 washers 900 345 See max torque settings page 2 6 Slide the two PM units together and secure using 4 counter sink screws 905 69 Fit the two handles 783 1055 to the front
148. efer to the ML2419A Range Calibrator Operation and Maintenance Manual 10585 00007 for specific instructions 5 3 PRINTER CONNECTION PROCEDURES 5 7 PRINTER See Chapter 3 Connectors for the location of the parallel port connector on the CONNECTION rear panel Connect a parallel printer cable from the ML2430A Series rear panel 25 pin D sub connector to the printer Select System Print to begin printing See Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for specific printer connector configuration options Printing can also be initiated in ML24XXA native mode using the GPIB PRINT command page 6 65 5 8 GPIB REMOTE The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be operated remotely through a General OPERATION Purpose Interface Bus GPIB connection to a host computer controller See Chapter 3 Connectors for the location of the GPIB connector The GPIB connec tor is configured through the System Rear Panel GPIB submenu See Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for specific GPIB connector configuration options that can be set from the front panel Refer to Chapter 6 GPIB Operation for a listing of the available GPIB commands mos If the ML2430A Series is addressed and the Remote Enable and Local Lockout GPIB remote operation REM and LLO lines are not set the front panel menus are still available even if is not available when the unit is communicating As long as the ML2430A Series is GPIB addressed the ML2430A Series the GPIB status box will be displayed
149. effect any measurement taken If you are in TRO mode change the Cal Factor Frequency and then take a measurement the Cal factor will be cal culated correctly Related Commands CFSRC CFFRQ ML2430A OM 6 27 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION CHCFG Channel input configuration CHANNEL Syntax CHCFG lt c gt lt config gt c 1or2 config OFF A B V A B B A A B B A Remarks A B V Sensor A Sensor B or External Volts If V is sent when in Profile or Source Sweep mode an execution error will occur A B B A Sensor A minus Sensor B Sensor B minus Sensor A A B B A Sensor A divided by Sensor B Sensor B divided by Sensor A Example To set channel 2 to A B CHCFG 1 A B Query CHCFG lt c gt Returned String CHCFG lt c gt lt config gt CHRES Set channel decimal point resolution CHANNEL Syntax CHRES lt c gt lt val gt c 1or2 val 1to3 Remarks Set the number of decimal places displayed for the specified channel For example specifying CHRES 1 1 would yield a display of 1 5 dBm CHRES 1 2 would yield 1 47 dBm CHRES 1 3 would yield 1 468 dBm If the num ber to be displayed is too large for the number of decimal places selected the decimal places displayed will be reduced so that the display value can be shown Query CHRES lt c gt Returned String CHRES lt c gt lt val gt CHUNIT Set Channel units CHANNEL Syntax CHUNIT lt c gt lt units gt c 1or2 6 28 ML243
150. elates to approximately 0 04 dB GPIB speed Consider 0 5 relates to 0 02 dB and 0 25 to 0 01 dB The default value af this when optimizing ter a system preset is 0 1 or about 0 004 dB Increasing the Set GPIB performance tle percent to 1 or more will substantially increase measurement speed Calfactor Allows entry of the calibration correction factor The calibration factor compen sates for mismatch losses and effective efficiency over the frequency range of the power sensor SENSOR SOURCE CFSRC CFVAL NOTE Frequency or V GHz are pre ferred methods as the sen sors have internal linearity correction which varies with frequency 4 6 Model ML2438A dual channel only Select the sensor to be con figured Toggles between Sensor A and Sensor B for all submenu functions Three selections are available Frequency Manual and V GHz Frequency In this mode correction data is read from the EEPROM in the sen sor and applied automatically to the measurement based on the us er s input frequency The EEPROM correction data value nearest to the entered frequency is used to calculate the correction applied to the signal ML2430A OM OPERATION NOTE When the MA2499B Anritsu Sensor Adapter or the MA2497A HP Sensor Adapter are used the input frequency should be set to 50 MHz irre spective of the measurement frequency Linearity correc tion factors are not applied when the adapters are being used NOT
151. ent returns to either TRO trigger hold or TR3 trigger free run mode depending on what it was previously set to TRO TR1 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 GPIB TRIGGER TRS Sets the ML2430A Series back into free run mode on both channels TRO TR1 TR2 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 Syntax TRGARM lt c gt lt state gt c 1 2o0r1 amp 2 state ON or OFF Remarks Sets the readout trigger arming ON or OFF when in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data If set to ON the system first checks to see if the BNC sweep blanking input is TRUE before it starts to trigger If set to OFF the system uses the trigger source TRSRC to decide when to trigger TRGARM will return an execution error if trying to set trigger arming ON when a display channel trigger source is already set to EXTTTL as they both use the same BNC input Query TRGARM lt c gt Returned String TRGARM lt c gt lt state gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the link triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned TRGDLY Trigger sample delay TRIGGER Syntax TRGDLY lt c g
152. equest 6 71 SYSLNM Saved set naming 6 75 TEXT 6 76 TEXTS User text display command 6 76 Table B 12 Trigger Functional Group Commands Command Function Page GTARM 6 46 GTDLY 6 47 GTGW 6 47 GTLVL 6 47 GTSRC 6 48 GTTYP 6 48 GTXTTL 6 49 LINK 6 51 TRGARM 6 78 TRGDLY 6 78 TRGGW 6 79 TRGLVL 6 79 TRGMODE 6 80 TRGSRC 6 80 TRGTYP 6 81 TRGXTTL Set external trigger edge type 6 81 Table B 13 ML24XXA Native Mode Query Commands Query Returned String Page ADDR 517 AVG lt 5 gt 6 17 AVGLL lt S gt 6 19 BAUTS 6 20 BAUTT 6 20 CFADJ lt 5 gt 6 21 CFCAL lt S gt 6 21 CFFRQ lt S gt 6 22 CFSRC lt S gt 6 22 CFUID lt S gt lt TABLE NO gt 6 24 CFUNITS lt S gt 6 24 CHCFG lt C gt 6 28 CHRES lt C gt 6 28 CHUNIT lt C gt 6 28 CURLK 6 30 CVSPF lt S gt 6 30 CVSPV lt S gt 6 30 CVSTF lt S gt 6 31 CVSTV lt S gt 63 DBLGHT DBLGHT lt MODE gt 6 31 B 6 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE Query Returned String Page DBLTIM 6 32 DCONT 6 32 DISP 6 33 DPEAK 6 33 DTRGD 6 34 DUTY lt S gt 6 34 DUTYS lt S gt 6 35 ENTERR 6 36 FBEEP lt C gt 6 38 FHOLD lt C gt 6 38 FROFF 6 39 GRAVG 6 40 GRCP 6 40 GRDATA 6 41 GRDDT 6 41 GRFS 6 42 GRMD 6 42 GRPIX 6 42 GRPTP 6 43 GRPRD 6 43 GRSWP lt S gt 6 44 GRSWS 6 44 GRTMM 6 45 GRYB 6 45 GRYT 6 45 GTARM 6 46 GTDLY 6 47 GTGW 6 47 GTLVL 6 47 GTSRC 6 4
153. er each bit corre sponds to the Service Request mask bits SM Status Message Syntax SM Remarks Returns the status message in the format AAaaBBCCccDDddEFGHIJKLMNOP lt cr gt lt lf gt where AA measurement error code aa entry error code BB operating mode ML2430A OM 6 125 HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS CC sensor A range cc sensor B range DD sensor A filter dd sensor B filter E measurement units F active entry channel G OSC status H REL mode status trigger mode J group trigger mode K limits checking status L sensor A limits status M sensor B limits status others not used GPIB OPERATION Stores the present configuration to the selected register To store the current instrument configuration in register 2 ST Store setup Syntax ST lt val gt EN val 1to10 Remarks Example ST2EN Related Commands RC TRO Trigger hold mode Syntax TRO Remarks Sets both channels to trigger hold mode It does not trigger until it receives a TR1 or TR2 or GET group executive trigger TRG or TR3 command If it receives a TR3 command it reverts back to the trigger mode it was in be fore the TRO command was sent If the REM line is low this command has no effect Related TR1 TR2 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 Commands TR1 Trigger immediate Syntax TR1 6 126 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION Remarks Related Commands TR2 Syntax Remarks Related Command
154. er has occurred This is the DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY and is denoted by a small x on the PROFILE display This marks the point on the display where data is taken at the time DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY is placed For example for the 1 kHz square wave the pulse edge would occur at the x point whenever the DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY is a multiple of 1 ms The x axis nomenclature al ways denotes this point with a time of ZERO t 0 this allows the user to always consider time intervals relative to the display trigger which is usually the point of interest ML2430A OM PROCEDURES Advanced Triggering and Setup Options ML2430A OM PROFILE OPERATION MODE NOTE For smaller values of display trigger delay it is possible that the display will cover time intervals on the left of the display for which there is no data In these conditions the cursors are normally prevented from displaying data taken there as it will be in error there is no data The position of x is nominally 10 of the screen This can be altered to any percentage the user requires in the SYSTEM more more GRAPHICS preferences menu as the PRETRIGGER percentage It can also be set to ZERO to remove pretrigger data and prevent confusion in cases of small display trigger delays Profile can display A B or A B measurements Note that in the case of a ratioed measurement A B the data is calculated as a straight dB difference not a LINEAR mw difference This is not th
155. erage value 6 107 6 121 KB Calibration factor 6 108 LG Set log units 6 109 6 122 LL Set low limit 6 109 LM Limits check state 6 109 LN Set linear units 6 110 OC Set calibrator state 6 123 B 14 ML2430A OM APPENDIX B HP 438A QUICK REFERENCE Command Function Page Ol Identification 6 64 6 97 6 111 6 123 OS Set offset value 6 111 6 123 PR Preset the unit 6 111 RA Auto Range 6 111 6 124 RC Recall setup 6 111 RH Range hold 6 112 6 124 RL Relative mode 6 113 RM Range hold set 6 113 6 125 RV Read service request mask value 6 113 SM Status message 6 114 6 125 ST Store setup 6 72 6 114 6 126 TRO Trigger hold mode 6 76 6 115 6 126 TR1 Trigger immediate 6 77 6 115 6 126 TR2 Trigger with a settling delay 6 77 6 115 6 127 TR3 Trigger free run 6 78 6 116 6 127 ZE Zero sensors 6 116 6 127 ML2430A OM B 15 HP IB SUPPORT B 7 HP IBSUPPORT HP 437B Commands B 16 Mnemonic CL CLS CS CTO CT9 DA DCO DC1 DD DE DF DN DU DY EN ERR ESR ESE ESE ETO ET9 EX FA FH FM FR GTO GT1 GT2 GZ HZ IDN KB KZ LG LH LL LMO APPENDIX B The following tables list HP IB commands for the HP 437B and HP 438A power meters and which commands are supported in the Anritsu ML2430A Series power meter Restrictions if any are also listed Com mands that are not supported will be ignored Action Enter msg terminator Set low limit Limit check off Supp
156. erence signal for absolute calibration of the sensors The calibration signal can be turned on or off through the Cal Zero menus see Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Use only compatible 50 Ohm N Type connectors ML2430A OM 3 1 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS CONNECTIONS Sensor A Connector Sensor B Connector ML2438A only 3 3 REAR PANEL 3 2 CONNECTORS An optional rear panel Calibrator connector is offered as an alternative see Fig ure 3 2 If the rear panel connector option is installed the front panel connector is not installed Refer to Chapter 5 Procedures for information on using the Cali brator output This connector is a 12 pin circular precision connector to be used in conjunction with power sensor cables An optional rear panel Channel A connector is offered as an alternative see Figure 3 2 If the rear panel connector option is installed the front panel connector is not installed This connector is a 12 pin circular precision connector to be used in conjunction with power sensor cables An optional rear panel Channel B connector is offered as an alternative see Figure 3 2 If the rear panel connector option is installed the front panel connector is not installed NOTE Only MA2400A Series sensors can be connected directly to the ML2430A Series Power Meters MA4700A and MA4600A Series sensors require the MA2499A or MA2499B Anritsu Sensor Adapter MP Series 10 pin sensors require an MA4001A or MA4002B
157. erial number 123456 and software version 1 0 in stalled Note that decimal 10 OAh character must be sent with the EOI to signal end of transmission lt Arbitrary Block gt This notation represents data transmitted as 8 bit data bytes OO FF hex 0 255 decimal notation is lt DAB gt Useful for transmitting large blocks of formatted ASCII or binary data or unformatted binary data The data stream is immediately preceded by a variable length ASCII header that is encoded with the number of data bytes to be sent The header always starts with the character 6 4 QUERY COMMANDS Many ML24XXA native GPIB commands have an equivalent query command that will return a current value or setting Query commands and their returned strings are provided with each command where applicable A complete listing of valid query commands and returned strings is provided in Appendix B Section B 2 6 4 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION 6 5 GPIBPCCARD SETUP GPIB Device Template GPIB Card Settings ML2430A OM GPIB PC CARD SETUP The following GPIB driver configuration set up is recommended for reliable GPIB communication with the ML2430A Series power meter The set up is expressed in the terms used by the National Instruments GPIB ISA and PCI cards and driv ers for WIN95 and DOS The ML2430A Series default primary address is 13 Separate device templates for the primary address of each device can usually be set up separately The set tings for t
158. es Event Status Byte enable Return Event status register enable mask Event status register request Request device identification Operations complete Operations complete Output 1 Reset device Setup service request enable register Return Service Request enable register Return status byte register Perform a trigger GET command Self Test Request device indentification Table B 7 GPIB Setup Functional Group Commands Command ADDR CONT EMUL FAST START Function Change GPIB address Continue GPIB emulation mode Operate in non 488 2 compliant mode Initial startup self test command Table B 8 GPIB Trigger Functional Group Commands Command GTO GT1 GT2 TRO TRi TR2 TR3 Function Set to ignore GET command Set GET command to TR1 type trigger Set GET command to TR2 type trigger Trigger hold mode Trigger immediate Trigger with a settling delay Trigger free run ML2430A OM ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE Page 6 12 6 7 6 12 6 100 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 102 6 102 6 102 6 102 6 16 6 102 6 64 6 97 6 111 6 123 Page 6 17 6 29 6 35 6 37 6 72 Page 6 46 6 46 6 46 6 76 6 115 6 126 6 77 6 115 6 126 6 77 6 115 6 127 6 78 6 116 6 127 B 3 ML24XXA QUICK REFERENCE APPENDIX B Table B 9 Profile Setup Functional Group Commands Command Function Page CURLK 6 30 DTRGD 6 34 GRAVG 6 40 GPRST 6 40 GRCP 6 40 GRDATA 6 41 GRFS 6 42 GRMD 6
159. es the following display control CHANNEL Select Channel 1 or Channel 2 The channel selected will be dis GRMD played on the left of the screen above the middle value of the y axis DATA HOLD Selects how the graph is displayed on the screen Select from GRPIX NORMAL AVG Min amp Max Min or Max TIME Sets the data hold time from 1 minute to 24 hours GRDDT This soft key becomes available when the System Setup MODE is set to Source Sweep The Source Sweep mode provides interconnection between a signal source generator and the power meter Using simple techniques this can provide swept power accurate measurements over any frequency range at very high speed The sweep data is available over GPIB and can provide a simple low cost scalar analyzer function 4 23 SYSTEM MENU OPERATION Anritsu 68 69000 Synthesized Sweep Generator HORIZ OUT ll SEQ SYNC OUT pn E OR ML2430A Series Power Meter gt 18 kg HEAVY WEIGHT DIGITAL INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 2 BNC Cables Figure 4 5 Source Sweep Mode Interconnection Example NOTE If either Min amp Max Min or Max is selected the display will keep the old data and may ap pear stationary The DATA HOLD mode in use is displayed on the left of the screen below the middle value of the y axis 4 24 lf the source used does not provide a blankin
160. et the range to lt val gt and then sets range hold A value of O selects Auto Ranging so that the range will change to take the best measurement auto matically Example To set the range to 3 RMSEN Related Commands RH RV Service request mask value Syntax RV Remarks Read service request mask value The returned string format is lt integer value gt Converting the integer value into an 8 bit binary number each bit corre sponds to the Service Request mask bits SE Select cal factor table Syntax SE lt table number gt EN table number Oto9 ML2430A OM 6 113 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS 6 114 SM SN ST Remarks status message Syntax Remarks GPIB OPERATION Selects the cal factor table to be used SM Returns the status message in the format AAaaBBCCccDDddEFGHIJKLMNOP lt cr gt lt lf gt where AA measurement error code aa entry error code BB operating mode CC sensor A range cc 0 DD sensor A filter dd O E linear log units F A G pwr ref status H REL mode status trigger mode J group trigger mode K limits checking status L sensor A limits status M O N offset status O duty cycle status P measurement units Cal table identity update Syntax val Remarks Store setup Syntax val SN lt val gt up to seven characters Since the ML2430A stores the cal factor table information in the sensor this data must be saved to the
161. ettings above Locate the rear bracket C41449 at the back of the PM on the other side to the large support bracket with two screws 905 68 and two washers 900 345 See max torque settings page 2 4 7 Fit the front plate 49362 with 6 screws 905 72 See max torque settings page 2 4 8 Position the base panel 49361 as shown in the drawing and secure with 6 snap rivets 788 575 9 Fit the four speed nut 790 319 to the rack in the correct place to allow mounting of the PM in the rack 10 Slide the PM into the rack and secure with 4 decorative screws 900 821 788 575 X6 SNAP RIVET PRESS DOWN CENTER PIN USING A FLAT EDGE 49361 NOTE FIT COMPLETED ASSEMBLY TO RACK USING DECORATIVE SCREW 900 821 X4 AND SPEED NUT 790 319 X4 IN 4 CORNER POSITIONS AS SHOWN ML2430A OM 041473 SUPPORT BRACKET 905 72 SCREW 900 795 X4 49362 FRONT PLATE BASE PANEL 905 68 X8 900 345 X8 783 1055 HANDLE X2 C37276 RACKMOUNT SIDE BRACKET LAT 041449 RACKMOUNT BRACKET REAR SUPPORT 2 5 RACK MOUNTING INSTALLATION ML2400A 03 Rack This section describes the assembly procedure for fitting two ML2430A Power Mount Installation Meters PM into a instrument rack The PM s must be fitted with rack mount top and bottom covers for the rack mount kit to be fitted The procedure involves fit ting support brackets two front handles and two rear support brackets one to each PM The two PM s which are lock
162. ffset TABLE if type TABLE OFFTBU OFFVAL 1 tod EDIT if type TABLE NEXT Freq 10kHz to 122GHz Offset 99 99dB to 99 99dB down C 4 ML2430A OM APPENDIX C up ENTRY 1 to 200 OFFCLR CLEAR selected table if type TABLE Duty cycle SENSOR not in ML2437A AJB DUTYS Duty cycle STATE On off DUTY DUTY cycle 100 to 0 1 RGH Rnge Hold ML2430A OM SENSOR MENU CHANNEL MENU APPENDIX C C 3 CHANNEL MENU The Channel menu controls the operation of a display channel There are two display channels Channel 1 and Channel 2 Channel 1 appears at the top of the readout display and channel 2 at the bottom Channel Setup CHANNEL 112 CHCFG INPUT configuration Off A B A B B A A B B A EXT V dual sensor configs NOT in ML2437A ExtV only available if system setup mode Readout CHUNIT Measurement UNITS dB m W dBuV dBmV V when input config EXT V CHRES Display decimal RESOLUTION 11213 MNMXS GMNMX Tracking MIN MAX display On off MMRST RESET tracked min max if MIN MAX ON REL Rel 1 if channel 1 ON REL Rel 2 if channel 2 ON Limits CHANNEL 12 HLIM HIGH Limit 99 99dB to 99 99dB 7dBuV to 207dBuV 53dBmV to 147dBmV 0 to 50W 0 to 20V LLIM LOW Limit 99 99dB to 99 99dB 7dBuV to 207dBuV 53dBmV to 147dBmV 0 to 50W 0 to 20V C 6 ML2430A OM APPENDIX C HLIMS LLIMS FHOLD FBEEP ML2430A OM HIGH State On off LOW St
163. following HP DeskJet 340 Canon BJC80 Other 300 500 600 Series and later HP printers are typically compatible For proper operation with the ML2430A the Canon BJC80 printer must be set to the EPSON LQ emulation mode Refer to the printer manual for instructions on setting the emulation mode 4 33 ML2430A OM CAL ZERO MENU Graphics NOTE These options allow ei ther the min max of each sweep to be dis played single or the conventional method for tracking variation of levelS over an ex tended period of time infinite Secure SECURE Identity IDN Ol 4 8 cAL ZERO MENU Zero Cal Cal 0 dBm CAL Zero ZERO 4 34 OPERATION This menu presents additional graphic display controls CONNECT This control is normally ON and causes the data between samples GRCP to be interpolated and lines drawn between sample points When OFF the sample points only are displayed as pixels TRACKING The number of scans of graph data between resetting the tracked GRTMM min and max when in graph mode Select SINGLE or INFINITE REF LINE Causes a dotted horizontal line to be drawn at the reference point GRES on the graph screen normally OFF PRE TRG Percentage of the screen that displays pretrigger information at the GRPTP best resolution available The display shows an x marking the trig ger point on the time axis Data before the actual trigger event is not available The trigger ref
164. from dBm to Watts the system will still check for the reading to rise above 10 even though the display units type has been changed Example The high limit is set to 10dBm and turned ON The display is in dBm A reading of 9 500dBm would pass If the display is subsequently changed to Watts a reading of 112 2uW would fail because the DISPLAYED value is higher than 10 Limit checking only uses the displayed value and does not change its value even though the display units have changed Related Commands HLIMS Query HLIM lt c gt Returned String HLIM lt c gt lt val gt HLIMS Turn on off High limits CHANNEL Syntax HLIMS lt c gt lt state gt c 1or2 state ON or OFF Remarks The HLIMS command turns the limits on and off Related Commands HLIM Query HLIMS lt c gt Returned String HLIMS lt c gt lt state gt HOLD Graph hold CHANNEL 6 50 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Syntax HOLD lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks This command holds the present graph displayed on the screen and is available in all graph modes In Profile and Power vs Time modes this command will not work when trigger source is set to MANUAL The held graph can be requested over GPIB by using the OGD or OGBD com mands The same graph data will be held until HOLD is switched off Related Commands OGD OGBD Query HOLD Returned String HOLD lt state gt IBBLP Blanking active TTL level BN
165. g on page 6 133 shows how to extract the binary data ML2430A OM 6 25 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION This message can be manipulated to program a different table using the CFULD command CFUSAV Cal factor table save SENSOR Syntax CFUSAV Remarks This command saves the cal factor table currently being edited to the ap propriate sensor Processing may take a couple of seconds Any command that can select a new sensor and or cal factor table for changing will not automatically save any previous changes made It is the users responsibil ity to issue a CFUSAV command CFUSEL Select cal factor table SENSOR Syntax CFUSEL lt s gt lt table number gt s AorB table number table number or combination to use O factory default table 1 to 10 user table being used 11 to 20 factory table user table being used Remarks Selects the cal factor table or combination of tables to be used and auto matically updates the sensor Example CFUSELA 13 Selects the factory table plus user table 3 in sensor A CFUTBL Number of cal factor tables in the sensor SENSOR Syntax CFUTBL lt s gt s AorB Remarks Returns the number of cal factor tables available in the selected sensor CFUUSE Number of cal factor table being used SENSOR Syntax CFUUSE lt s gt s AorB 6 26 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks Returns a number indicating the cal factor table or combination of tables
166. g output the blanking signal may be disabled as follows select System Rear Panel BNC Select PORT until INPUT 1 digital is selected then select TTL Level to alter the active state of the blanking signal expected Setting the TTL Level to LOW will allow the Source sweep to progress without a Blanking signal This is useful for third party sources or simple VTO systems If a Source Sweep is later selected which does provide a blanking signal remember to restore the polarity of this signal to HIGH or an incorrect dis play will result Operating a source sweep which has BANDSWITCH blanking de lays in it without an appropriate blanking signal may lead to glitches in the resulting measurement at the bandswitch points simple VTO systems do not usually have bandswitch points Source sweep operation mode includes the following display controls CHANNEL Select Channel 1 or Channel 2 The channel selected will be dis GRMD played on the left of the screen above the middle value of the y axis DATA HOLD This selects how the graph is displayed on the screen Select from GRPIX NORMAL Min amp Max Min or Max With Min amp Max selected the minimum and maximum points for each sample are shown If Connect Points is ON SYSTEM Graph ics CONNECT a vertical bar is drawn between these points Min displays only the minimum for this sample Max displays only the maximum for this sample MODE Source sweep mode FREQUENCY or POWER SRCMOD
167. gister using the SRE command page 6 102 For more detail see the STATUS command page 6 72 This bit can only be cleared by sending a CLS command pages 6 12 6 100 LIM If a channel pass fail limit fails this bit will be set This bit can be used to set an SRQ by setting the same bit in the SRE register using the SRE command For more detail see the STATUS command This bit can only be cleared by sending a CLS command MAV If data is available in the output queue this bit is set This bit can be used to set an SRQ by setting the same bit in the SRE register using the SRE command This bit is only cleared when there is no data waiting to be transmitted ML2430A OM 6 9 FUNCTIONAL GROUPS ESB 6 9 FUNCTIONAL GROUPS BNC CALIBRATION CHANNEL DATA OUTPUT DISPLAY GPIB 488 2 GPIB SETUP GPIB TRIGGER PROFILE SETUP 6 10 GPIB OPERATION If any of the event register bits are set and the corresponding event status enable bits are set the ESB bit in the status byte will be set This bit can be used to set an SRQ by setting the same bit in the SRE register using the SRE command The ESB bit is cleared when the ESR is read by using the ESR command pages 6 14 6 54 6 101 Throughout the ML24XXA native mode section of this chapter the distinctive white on black text in the upper corner of each command description area indi cates the Functional Group to which the command belongs Figure 6 1 All ML24XXA
168. he start and stop voltages are assumed to be O and 10V and the start and stop fre quencies are taken from the System Source sweep menu Calibrate the V GHz setup by setting O and 10v and the frequencies F1 and F2 that these voltages correspond to sweep width This method activates real time cal factor correction on a swept basis including any user cal factor tables provid ing swept power measurements Note that V GHz output should not be used as this limits the range of the signal applied to the meter when sweeping narrow widths The fixed 0 10V ramp should be used to ensure correct sweep operation In normal operation leave the CalFactor SOURCE set to V GHz as this instructs the meter to apply cal factor correction proportional to the input ramp and en sures that the whole sweep of data is cal factor corrected in real time at every data point If the CalFactor Source is set to Manual or Frequency a single fre quency cal factor will be applied through the sweep or a manually entered value This may be useful for some applications where the sweep signal is used for others purposes for example power sweep etc In this mode the Ramp input is scaled to Start and Stop power settings The start and stop voltages are assumed to be O and 10V and the start and stop power settings are taken from the System Source sweep menu Make sure the Sensor CalFactor SOURCE is set to Frequency or Manual In power sweep mode V GHZ is not used T
169. he 50 MHz cal factor table entry is output OF lt state gt ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION Ol OS PR RA RC ML2430A OM State Remarks HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS O OFF 1 ON For example OF 1 Turn offsets ON Return identification string Syntax Remarks Set offset value Syntax val Remarks Example Preset the unit Syntax Remarks Auto Range Syntax Remarks Recall setup Syntax Ol Returned format lt company name gt lt model gt lt firmware version gt OS lt val gt EN 99 99 to 99 99 dB Specifies the offset applied to the displayed value Values can be entered in 0 01 dB increments OS10 13EN Set an offset of 10 13 to the displayed value PR Presets the unit to the HP factory defaults This command does not effect the calibration factors stored in the sensor data tables RA Sets the ML2430A Series to automatically select the correct range for the measurement RC lt val gt EN 6 111 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION val 1to10 Remarks The ML2430A Series can store up to 10 instrument configurations for con venient recall The configuration parameters stored are the same parame ters the ML2430A Series stores in its own SAV and RCL native commands Therefore RC is equivalent to RCL and ST is equivalent to SAV Selecting Register O always restores the previous power meter configura tion providing an expedient
170. he TR3 command will return the system to its previous state if the TRO Trigger hold command has been used GTSRC GTSRC lt source gt ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GTTYP Set profile trigger type TRIGGER Syntax GTTYP lt type gt type RISE FALL Remarks When the profile system trigger source is set to INTA or INTB Internal A or B the ML2430A Series triggers on a power level GTLVL rising or falling This command sets the trigger for a rising or falling edge Related Commands GTLVL GTSRC Query GTTYP Returned String GTTYP lt type gt GTXTTL Set profile external trigger edge TRIGGER Syntax GTXTTL lt type gt type RISE FALL Remarks When the profile system trigger source is set to External TTL the ML2430A Series triggers on a TTL level rising or falling This command sets the trigger for either a rising or falling edge Related Commands GTSRC Query GTXTTL Returned String GTXTTL lt type gt HLIM Set High limits CHANNEL Syntax HLIM lt c gt lt val gt c 102 ML2430A OM 6 49 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION val Units Min Max dBm 99 99 99 99 dBmV 53 00 147 00 Watts 0 0 50 0 Remarks Sets the high limit The HLIMS command turns the limits on and off It is not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked against the displayed value Therefore if the limits have been set for 10 dBm HLIM 1 10 and the display units are subsequently changed
171. he annotation at the bottom of the screen is manually entered there is currently no digital connection between the power meter and the source and these can be entered through the SYSTEM Source sweep more Start and Stop softkeys Note that the scaling for the 10V ramp input is not directly applied to the bottom of the screen the user is able to enter this directly and may include effects of fre quency translation devices The other controls remain similar to the Profile graphic mode SYSTEM Control provides access to most other functions used during measurement such as CURSOR movement and control SCALING and READOUT from the cursor Note that the between cursor average has no meaning in Source Sweep mode and in place of this the frequency of the measurement is indicated instead x1 and x2 The readout is only updated while the system is sweeping Averaging may be applied by selecting SENSOR Averaging and setting the STATE to ON An averaging number may then be applied for either sensor inde pendently Averaging is EXPONENTIAL in character so changes in response for example adjusting tuning of a filter will gradually settle to their final measure ment value over a period of time A larger number will take longer to settle Good measurements may be achieved down to 45 dBm 65 dB dynamic range with an average value as low as 4 Values up to 64 and higher produce significantly lower noise readings All averaging is performed on
172. he device template for the ML2430A Series are Terminate read on EOS Set EOI with EOS on write Type of compare on EOS EOS byte Send EOI at end of write Readdressing Secondary address NO YES 8 bit OxOA 10 decimal YES YES NONE The recommended GPIB card settings for use with the ML2430A Series are Terminate read on EOS Set EOI with EOS on writes Type of compare on EOS EOS byte Send EOI at end of write System controller Assert REN when SC Enable Auto Serial polling NI card Cable length for HS488 NO YES 8 bit OxOA 10 decimal YES YES YES NO OFF USING 488 1 GPIB GPIB OPERATION 6 6 USING 488 1 GPIB IEEE 488 1 level commands are in the form of data byte codes with the attention ATN line set A separate function is normally provided to drive these commands from a GPIB program A typical GPIB driver library call for 488 1 and 488 2 is given for each of the following commands Refer to the IEEE 488 1 and IEEE488 2 device driver manuals for full definitions of the responses and to find the actual command format for your GPIB driver library Commands Device CLear DCL These commands clear the GPIB device interface and have the following effects and Selected Device Clear SDC O All buffered messages waiting to be processed are cleared a All buffered data waiting to be read from the device is cleared a Stop any pending actions For example if a request for data has been sent and the s
173. he frequency and four bytes to represent the dB value The four byte value can be created by multiplying the floating point number by 1024 and converting the LONG number to an ASCII string For example ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS 10 234 becomes 10479 converted to hexadecimal FFFFD711 See the programming examples for more detail OFFTYP Offset type to use SENSOR Syntax OFFTYP lt s gt lt type gt s AorB type OFF FIXED TABLE Remarks Selects the type of offset to use OFF No offset to be used FIXED Use the fixed value OFFFIX specified TABLE Use the Offset table OFFTBL specified Query OFFTYP lt s gt Returned String OFFTYP lt s gt lt type gt OFFVAL Sensor Offset Value SENSOR Syntax OFFVAL lt s gt s AorB Remarks Returns the Offset value being applied to the specified sensor Related Commands OFFTBL OFFTYP OGBD Output Graph Binary Data DATA OUTPUT Syntax OGBD Remarks Output the next complete set of graph data to the GPIB in the long integer form of 1024 bits per dB as a definite length arbitrary block response data The C programming example Binary output decoding on page 6 133 shows how to extract the binary data The response form is as follows OGBD lt gt lt length gt lt number_of_bytes gt lt data_byte_1 gt lt data_byte_2 gt lt data_byte_n gt lt n gt lt length gt number of ASCII characters that make up the number_of_bytes
174. he front panel If all tests pass successfully no self test information is displayed Failure and warning messages that can be displayed on the front panel are Flash code csum Personality csumVolatile RAM Cal data csum Non Vol RAM Software version this is only a warning Current Setup Saved Setups Secure Mem clear this is only a warning Display Keyboard DSP error followed by a 4 digit hexadecimal error code 4 3 POWER ON PROCEDURE 4 4 OPERATION If any error other than a DSP error is encountered the text Press ANY key to continue will be displayed at the bottom of the screen If only warnings are encountered nothing will be displayed at the bottom of the screen and the unit will continue to initialize lf a DSP error occurs the text Restart unit If error persists con tact Service Center is displayed and the unit will halt the self test Make note of the hexadeci mal error code displayed and contact your nearest Anritsu Service Center see Chapter 2 Table 2 1 Self test error messages are also available over the GPIB as a self test status string see STERR command page 6 74 ML2430A OM OPERATION 4 4 sensor MENU Setup NOTE The MODE selection is not available in Profile or Source Sweep modes NOTE When measuring mod ulated signals with a di ode sensor ensure Modulated Average is selected or measure ment errors may result ML2430A OM SE
175. he power meter Shipment should be repackaged in the original shipping container If this container is no longer available and the power meter is being returned to Anritsu for repair ad vise Anritsu Customer Service Center they will send a new shipping container free of charge In the event neither of these two options is possible follow the packaging instructions below Use a Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 275 pound test Suitable strength This carton should have inside dimensions of no less than Container six inches larger than the instrument dimensions to allow for cushioning Protect the Wrap the instrument to protect the finish Instrument Cushion the Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or Instrument urethane foam between the carton and the instrument Provide at least three inches of dunnage on all sides Seal the Seal the carton using either shipping tape or an industrial stapler Container Address the Cdf he instrument is being returned to Anritsu for service mark the tainer address of the appropriate Anritsu service center Table 2 1 the Return Materials Authorization RMA number and your return ad dress on the carton in a prominent location ML2430A OM 2 11 2 12 2 12 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT Table 2 3 ANRITSU Service Centers UNITED STATES ANRITSU SALES COMPANY 685 Jarvis Drive Morgan Hill CA 95037 2809 Telephone 408 776 8300 FAX 408 776 1744 ANRITSU SALE
176. he startup process all commands except STERR START CONT and GPIB 488 2 event and status commands will produce a GPIB execution error STERR will return the selftest result string STERR CONT DATA OUTPUT STATUS Replies with the power meter s current state code In this format the num ber of letters specifies the number of digits with preceding zeroes for pad ding The format is ABCDEFGHIJKLMNNOOPOQRRRRSSSSTUVWXYZ12 where A Operating mode 0 Digital readout 1 Profile mode channel 1 2 Profile mode channel 2 3 Power vs Time channel 1 4 Power vs Time channel 2 5 Source sweep chan 1 6 Source sweep chan 2 B Channel 1 input configuration 0 OFF 1 A 2 B 3 A B 4 B A 5 A B 6 B A 7 EXT Volts C Channel 2 input configuration 0 OFF 1 A 2 B 3 A B 4 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML2430A OM ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS B A 5 A B 6 B A 7 EXT Volts D Channel 1 units 0 dBm 1 Watts 2 Volts 3 dBuV 4 dBmV E Channel 2 units 0 dBm 1 Watts 2 Volts 3 dBuV 4 daBmV F Channel 1 relative status 0 Rel OFF 1 Rel ON G Channel 2 relative status 0 Rel OFF 1 Rel ON H Channel 1 low limit state 0 OFF 1 ON Channel 1 high limit state 0 OFF 1 ON J Channel 2 low limit state 0 OFF 1 ON K Channel 2 high
177. her cursor moves with it to maintain their relative positions and time interval between them When the cursors are linked the relative time positions are altered by adjust ing the gate width in the TRIGGER SETUP WIDTH submenu HOLD In Profile Power vs Time and Source Sweep modes the graph HOLD HOLD function allows a graph to be held and printed The key action is a toggle action with the warning message Graph Display HELD displayed at the top of the screen when HOLD is active Whenever measurement setup parameters are changed graph hold will automatically be released AUTO scale Auto scale for all graphic modes Profile Source Sweep and Power GRAUTO vs Time In Profile and Source Sweep modes auto scale will be based on the min and max of the previous profile or sweep Controls the characteristics of the LCD display BACKLIGHT Controls the LCD backlight during internal battery operation Can DBLGHT be ON OFF or timed to go off after a specified period to save bat tery life The backlight is always on during AC or external DC power operation 4 27 SYSTEM MENU 4 28 Sound Contrast DOWN DCONTD DCONT Contrast UP DCONTU DCONT TIMED DBLTIM PEAKMETER DPEAK FREQ FROFF TEXT TEXT TEXTS OPERATION Reduces the display contrast Adjust to suit ambient conditions Increases the display contrast Adjust to suit ambient conditions Sets the time limit when the backlight will turn off
178. hich is requesting service SRQ bit MAV bit If status_byte And 80 80 Then It is the ML2430A read back value Call DLLreceive 0 13 result 10 STOPend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Value Val result End If Loop Until Value lt gt 256 GetT R2Reading Value End Function 6 130 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION 488 2 General Send Receive System ML2430A OM PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES This function uses the status registers to synchronize the GPIB commands and return data if a query command was used The system waits until the command string has been completed and then checks to see if any data is on the GPIB out out buffer If so the data is returned in the Result argument and any error code generated in receiving the data is returned in the Result_Code argument For example Use 4882SendReceive 0 13 O 1 Result Result_Code to re turn a reading from the ML2430A Series Note that this function is written in pseudo code and cannot be executed as is Function 4882SendReceive Board Addr cmdstring Result Re sult_code as integer Setup SRE and ESE values first then process User commands then do OPC cmd ESE 49 SRE 48 cmdstring OPC Send the command string Call DLLsend Board Addr cmd Len cmd Nlend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Wait for either the MAV bit Message Available or and the ESB bit OPC WaitSRQ Board Address MAV_bi
179. his command will clear any SRQ s and read the status byte of the device 6 6 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION 6 7 USING 488 2 GPIB 488 2 Command Format Status Byte ML2430A OM USING 488 2 GPIB Typical device library calls are 488 1 ibrsp and 488 2 ReadStatusByte The IEEE 488 1 GPIB standard was updated in 1987 to 488 2 to better enforce standardization of GPIB communication This section explains the fundamentals of 488 2 GPIB operation and how it is implemented in the ML2430A Series Power Meter Refer to the full IEEE 488 2 standard for more detailed information All commands should follow the basic format lt MNEMONIC gt lt white space gt lt comma separated message parameters gt lt terminator gt lt white space gt Normally a space character but can be any of the white space characters listed in the 488 2 manual lt terminator gt A line feed character for example n in C or VBLF in Vis ual Basic An EOI End Of transmission Interrupt can be used as the last character instead of the line feed Example AVG A MOV 64 A number of commands can be put into one program message by separating the commands with semicolons Example CHCFG 1 A CHCFE 2 B A CHUNIT 1 W CHUNIT 2 DBM OPMD DIGIT The 488 2 standard added two extra predefined bits to the status byte these bits are the Event Status Bit ESB and the Message AVailable bit MAV Event Status Bitn 488 2 there is an event status register ESR
180. id result 5 InStr 5 result 5 redimension our global array ReDim GraphData 1 To Number_of_elements As Single format the result string so that we only have the elements result Right result Len result InStr 5 result loop through elements and place into our global array For 1 To Number_of_elements next place InStr result 1 If next place 1 Then next place Len result GraphData l Val Mid result 1 next place reduce the elements by one the one we have just put in the array result Right result Len result InStr result Next End Function ML2430A OM 6 129 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES GPIB OPERATION Status This function demonstrates how to use the Status Registers to provide synchroni Register zation Control Uses the TR2 trigger with settling command to make a reading Function GetT R2Reading channel As Single make space for the result Dim result As String result String 10 0 Send Status Register setup command TRO hold trigger mode Call DLLsend 0 13 SRE 16 TR2 1 14 NLend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Set loop flag Value 256 Do Loop until SRQ is asserted Do Call DLLTestSRQ 0 SRQ ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Loop Until SRQ 0 SRQ asserted read the ML2430As status register Call DLLReadStatusByte 0 13 status_byte ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Check if it is the ML2430A w
181. if the BACKLIGHT setting is set to TIMED Enter a value from 0 0 to 100 0 minutes Turns on the peakmeter display for Sensor A Sensor B or both Sensors and B The peakmeter display will eclipse any trigger icons The peak meter display range covers 12 dB When above the displayed maximum or below the displayed minimum the range is switched by 10 dB in the appropriate direction Note that in the event that the channel is displaying an alternative measurement for example external volts from the rear panel BNC the peak meter will continue to represent the Sensor A and or B data This is useful for monitoring an external voltage on the meter while peaking up a response being monitored by a sensor such as RF output Turns FREQuency offset display ON or OFF When ON a continu ous indication of the frequency used for Cal Factor is displayed in small text at the top of the display along with any sensor offset if applied GPIB user TEXT display ON or OFF When ON a user defined text string can be displayed at the top of the display area The text string can only be defined over the GPIB Controls system sounds KEY KEYCK EDIT ENTERR LIMIT 1 FBEEP LIMIT 2 FBEEP CURSOR Turns the audible key click on or off Turns the audible edit error tone on or off Limit Fail beep on channel 1 on or off Limit Fail beep on channel 2 on or off CURSOR out of screen beep If a cursor is moved into an illegal space
182. il TTL Supports nector is user configur Input 2 Analog Input 1 Digital Multi purpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz connection Supports O to 20V nominal input voltage with software selectable scaling V GHz is used for automatic CAL FACTOR correction by applying an external voltage scaled to fre Calibrator Connector Alternate Calibrator output con nector If this rear panel connector or Limits Pass fail TTL Supports pass fail testing for channels able for Blanking Input quency The correct calibration factor for this frequency is automatically interpo option is installed the front panel pass fail testing for channels 1 and 2 1 and 2 Also configurable to used to ARM measure lated and applied when in V GHz calibration factor mode Different scaling may be connector ie not installed Referto Also configurable to output a output a real time measure ments in triggering applied to sensor AorB allowing for measurement of frequency translation de Chapter 5 Procedures for infor real time measurement signal from ment signal from sensor in modes or TTL Trigger vices Available simultaneously with channel A and or B data the data rate is as set mation on using the Reference sensor input A suitable for leveling put B suitable for leveling Input on the channel The default data rate is 20 ms in DEFAULT measurement mode purposes purposes with the default settling time of 0 1 and programmable in PROFILE operation Calibrat
183. ill be communicated from the source to the meter If the source frequency power level or the frequency itself is changed the source sweep display will be updated where appropriate To communicate with an Anritsu 68 69000 series synthesizers the synthesizer firmware must be later than the levels shown below for each model 680xxB 3 39 681xxB 3 44 682xxB 2 41 683xxB 2 50 680x5B 1 26 681x5B 1 32 682x5B 1 30 683x5B 1 34 690xxA 1 21 691xxA 1 26 692xxA 1 26 693xxA 1 35 690x5A 1 21 691x5A 1 24 692x5A 1 24 693x5A 1 31 Contact your nearest Anritsu Service Center for a firmware upgrade if necessary 5 13 POWER vs The ML2430A Series Power vs Time mode is a graphical chart display of one of TIME MODE the display channels as selected in the SYSTEM PWRvsTIME menu The trig gering setup is as set for Readout mode operation Power vs Time mode provides a chart display on a timed basis where the x axis of the graph is defined in units of time The user specifies the sweep period and within this sweep period each pixel depicts all the measurements taken within a 200th of the sweep period 5 18 ML2430A OM PROCEDURES 5 14 USERCAL FACTORS NOTE This feature is also available when using Anritsu MA4700A MA4600A sensors with the Anritsu MA2499B Sensor Adapter Since the MA4700A MA4600A sensors do not contain an EEPROM the user cal factors are stored in the MA2499B adapter EEPROM NOTE
184. ingle key press recalls a saved setup A message across the lower area of the screen will prompt for keypad keys 1 9 or O to be pressed to recall setups 1 10 if saved setup data is available in the selected location The exit softkey or any other menu key will exit fast recall mode Resets the system parameters to the default setup see Appendix A Section A 3 RESET RST This selection will reset the system setup The offset tables and the GPIB interface will not be affected FACTORY FRST This selection will reset the system setup including the offset ta bles and GPIB interface This soft key becomes available when the System Setup MODE is set to Profile Profile operation mode includes the following display controls CHANNEL GRMD PERIOD GRPRD DELAY DTRGD Select Channel 1 or Channel 2 The channel selected will be dis played on the left of the screen above the middle value of the y axis and is used for all Profile data displays Sets the time period over which the system collects data and scales the data into the profile graph after a trigger event Enter the data collection period in ms or us See System Graphics Pretrig to move the t 0 trigger event position of the displayed waveform Specifies the period of time after a trigger event to delay the start of the display window For the trigger to line up with the marked trigger point on repetitive waveforms the delay period should be either zero
185. inter Anritsu Sensor Adapter HP Sensor Adapter 5W Limiter 0 01 3 GHz Nm f 75W 5W Limiter 0 01 18 GHz Nm f 50W 5W Limiter 0 01 20 GHz Km f 50W SW Limiter 0 01 26 GHz Km f 50W 5 Watt Attenuator Nm f 750 5 Watt Attenuator Nm f 500 50 Watt Attenuator Nm f 500 5 Watt Attenuator Km f 500 ML2430A OM 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 2 INITIAL INSPECTION 2 3 SENSOR HANDLING 2 4 power REQUIREMENTS ML2430A OM Chapter 2 Installation This chapter provides information for the initial inspection and preparation for use of the ML2430A Series Power Meter Shipping and storage infor mation is also included Inspect the shipping container for damage If the container or cushioning material is damaged retain until the contents of the shipment have been checked against the packing list and the instrument has been checked for mechanical and electrical operation If the power meter is damaged mechanically notify your local sales repre sentative or Anritsu Customer Service Center If either the shipping con tainer is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as Anritsu Retain the shipping materials for the car rier s inspection The sensors are enclosed in a polycarbonate case to help prevent dam age The sensor connectors however are exposed and are a critical part of the microwave instrument Refer to the MA24XXA Series Power Sensor manual 10585 00004 for
186. isplay off The peak meter display range covers 12 dB When above the displayed maximum or below the displayed minimum the range is switched by 10 dB in the appropriate direction Note that in the event that the channel is displaying an alternative mea surement e g external volts from the rear panel BNC the peak meter continues to represent the Sensor A and or B data This is very useful for monitoring an external voltage on the meter while peaking up a response being monitored by a sensor e g RF output Query DPEAK Returned String DPEAK lt mode gt DTRGD Display Trigger Delay PROFILE SETUP Syntax DTRGD lt val gt val 0 0 to 7 0 seconds Remarks The delay time from the trigger point to when the profile starts to be drawn refer to Figure 4 4 page 4 20 Example DTRGD 1 25MS Sets the display trigger delay to 1 25 ms Query DTRGD Returned String DTRGD lt val gt DUTY Duty cycle SENSOR Syntax DUTY lt s gt lt duty cycle gt s AorB duty cycle 0 1 to 100 Remarks Applies a duty cycle to the selected sensor An offset will be applied based on the entered value Example DUTY A 50 6 34 Specifies a duty cycle of 50 that will alter the displayed readings by ap proximately 3 01 dB ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION Related Commands Query Returned String DUTYS Duty cycle state ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS DUTYS DUTY lt s gt DUTY lt s gt lt duty cycle gt Syntax DUTYS lt s gt lt st
187. its Definition Mnemonic Definition Mnemonic les w a Table 6 1 Numeric Data Suffix Mnemonics ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION DATA YO FORMATS All of the Status enable type commands SRE for example Stored numbers i e 0 1 2 3 4 5 Offset table numbers i e 1 2 3 4 5 6 GPIB addresses 1 to 30 User Averaging number in the AVG command 1 to 512 Display contrast number 1 to 12 The ML2430A Series data formats are summarized below lt NR1 gt This notation represents ASCII integer values A comma is used to separate multiple values sent in a single command input or output string Examples of values that can be represented by lt NR1 gt notation 4 0 29 179 lt NR2 gt This notation represents ASCII floating point values in decimal point format A comma is used to separate multiple values sent in a single command s input or output string Examples of values that can be represented by lt NR2 gt notation 1 0 0 00015 12 743 180 07 lt NR3 gt This notation represents ASCII floating point values in exponential format scien tific notation A comma is used to separate multiple values sent in a single command s input or output string Examples of values that can be represented by lt NR3 gt notation 1 0E9 7 056E3 9 0E2 3 42E2 lt NRf gt This notation is used to signify that data can be in either lt NR1 gt lt NR2 gt or lt NR3 gt format as described above Examples of va
188. its error bits are both set 8 Once the status register has been read it must be cleared to allow further SRQ messages to be sent Before the status register is cleared further autodial actions limits failure or sensor range error should be disabled to prevent any un necessary autodial attempts by the meter when already connected to a remote PC To clear the status register use the command OLONI 5 1 1 PROFILE The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be used to view signals in Profile Read OPERATION MODE out Power vs Time and Source Sweep modes This section describes setting up and viewing signals in the Profile mode Profile mode allows the viewing of a sin gle channel 1 or 2 as set up in the Channel menu plotted against time 5 10 ML2430A OM PROCEDURES PROFILE OPERATION MODE To view the time profile of a signal enter the PROFILE mode via SYSTEM SETUP MODE toggles through READOUT PROFILE and POWER vs TIME Parameters needed to set up a PROFILE display are NOTE To operate the Univer sal power sensors in profile mode Option 1 must be fitted Activate option 1 mode before selecting profile mode under the SENSOR Setup OPTION FAST CW menu 1 TRIGGER SETUP provides access to a special TRIGGER configura tion options The default mode is CONTINUOUS which provides for a non synchronized oscilloscope type display This type of display is useful for general monitoring of a signal and showing its variation over time
189. k can leak explode or catch on fire if it is opened disassem bled or exposed to fire or very high temperatures No attempt should be made to open repair or modify the battery package When a battery pack has reached the end of its func tional life it should be re turned to the nearest Anritsu Service Center for proper re cycling or disposal Do not treat a used battery as normal waste 2 10 INSTALLATION BATTERY CHARGING REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT For optimal battery life the battery should be fully discharged before re charging Repeated partial charge discharge cycles can result in a loss of battery capacity recoverable by applying several conditioning full charge discharge cycles If the power meter determines that a battery conditioning cycle is required a message stating this requirement will be displayed on the front panel and will remain until the battery is fully condi tioned or replaced A number of complete conditioning cycles may be nec essary to fully condition a battery The ideal battery temperature ranges are A Discharging 20 to 50 C 4 to 122 F A Charging 10 to 45 C 50 to 113 F Note that charging will be inhibited if the temperature falls outside these limits To remove the battery first disconnect any AC or DC input line power Open the battery compartment as illustrated and remove the battery Re place the battery only with an identical battery or an equivale
190. k triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned VZERO Zero the BNC input connector CALIBRATION Syntax VZERO Remarks Zeros the multipurpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz connection Analog Input 2 This will calibrate the units to read zero volts on this BNC During this operation the connector should either not be connected to any thing or should be connected to a O Volt source A settling time must be al lowed after this command before reading any other commands ZERO Zero the selected sensor CALIBRATION Syntax ZERO lt s gt s AorB Remarks Zero out the noise from the selected sensor 6 82 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION GPIB EMULATION MODES 6 1 1 GPIB EMULATION The ML2430 Anritsu power meter emulates the GPIB communication of other MODES Zeroing a Sensor Sensor Ranges Output Format power meters The emulation mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM more more Rear panel GPIB MODE menu see Chapter 4 Operation or through the GPIB command EMUL page 6 86 The available emulation modes and command restrictions are Power Meter Command Restrictions Hewlett Packard HP 436 All commands supported Hewlett Packard HP 437 Commands not supported DN DU ERR LP LT SP UP and 2 Hewlett Packard HP 438 Commands not supported DO LP1 and LP2 Anritsu ML4803 Commands not supported PCT VSW
191. l dis play may exhibit excessively slow response The soft sided carry case part number D41310 and optional front panel cover option ML2400A 12 can be used to help retain internally generated heat and may improve response The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be ordered with rack mounting hardware that allows the unit to be mounted into a standard 19 inch equipment rack There are two rack mount option kits available a The ML2400A 01 Rack Mount option allows the installation of a sin gle ML2430A in either the left or right side rack position O The ML2400A 03 Rack Mount option allows side by side mounting of two ML2430A Power Meters The Power Meter itself must be ordered from the factory as a rack mount ready unit As such it will be fitted with rack mount top and bottom cases These cases have extra mounting holes so that the rack mount kits can be installed Instructions for installing the rack mount kits follow This section describes the assembly procedure for fitting a single ML2430A Power Meter PM unit into an instrument rack The PM must be fitted with rack mount top and bottom covers before the rack mount kit can be fitted The proce dure involves fitting the support bracket to the PM The PM can then be loaded and secured in the rack position desired 2 3 RACK MOUNTING INSTALLATION The required parts and tools are listed below Quantity Description Anritsu Part Max Torque each Number Setting 2 PAN HEAD
192. leted but there must always be one data pair remaining If there is a data pair at 50 MHz this will be the data pair that will remain The user must ensure that the maximum number of cal factor data pairs entered into a table is not exceeded Sensors with a maxi mum frequency of up to 40 GHz will hold 90 pairs while sensors with a maximum frequency of 50 GHz will hold 110 pairs Once all changes have been made the SAVE soft key saves the changed data to the sensor If any user cal factor data is changed and not saved any attempt to exit the cal factor menu or select a new table will result in a prompt to discard or save the changes When the Cal Factor Source is set to Manual the operator is ex pected to enter the calibration factor value in dB or terms Sets a calibration factor to be used when performing a O dBm cali bration and the calibration factor source is set to Manual This value is the only factor applied when performing a 0 dBm reference calibration If the sensor calibration factor source is set to V GHz or Frequency the sensor internal EEPROM correction value at 50 MHz is used ML2430A OM OPERATION Averaging NOTE Automatic averaging also applies an algo rithm to enhance set tling at low power levels e g signal sources ML2430A OM SETUP CVSTF CVSPF CVSTV CVSPV SENSOR MENU Sets up the Start and Stop frequencies and voltages when Source is set to V GHz This tells the ML2430A how
193. limit state 0 OFF 1 ON L Sensor A measurement mode 0 Default 1 MOD average 2 Custom M Sensor B measurement mode 0 Default 1 MOD average 2 Custom NN Sensor A range hold Manual 01 to 05 AUTO 11 to 15 OO Sensor B range hold Manual 01 to 05 AUTO 11 to 15 P Sensor A averaging mode 0 OFF 1 AUTO 2 Moving 3 Repeat Q Sensor B averaging mode 0 OFF 1 AUTO 2 Moving 3 Repeat RRRR Sensor A average number For Profile and Source Sweep modes this number is between 1 and 512 For digital Readout or Power vs Time modes the values are either 1 to 512 or if in AUTO averaging mode 513 to 1024 SSSS Sensor B average number 0000 if ML2437A For Profile and Source Sweep modes this number is between 1 and 512 For digital Readout or Power vs Time modes the values are either 1 to 512 or if in AUTO averaging mode 513 to 1024 T Sensor A low level average 0 OFF 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High U Sensor B low level average 0 OFF 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION V Sensor A zeroed status 0 Not zeroed 1 Zeroed W Sensor B Zeroed status 0 Not zeroed 1 Zeroed X GPIB trigger mode 0 TRO hold ON 1 Free run Y GPIB group trigger mode 0 GTO 1 GT1 2 GT2 Z Calibrator state 0
194. llowing Set the CMD bit in the event status enable byte and set the ESB bit in the status register enable byte Send BOB 32 ORE 32 Now if an unrecognized command is sent to the ML2430A an SRQ will be given Send asdf An SRQ will be indicated To clear the SRQ do a serial poll this should return the decimal value 96 bit 6 for the SRQ and bit 5 for the ESB The SRQ will be cleared To read the Event Status Register ESR send ESR This will put 32 or 160 if PON is set in the output buffer to be read Message This bit is set if there is any data in the output buffer waiting to be Available read and can be used to ensure that only the latest reading is Bit MAV used Upon receiving a request for data the next reading taken is put in the output buffer The data in the output buffer should always be read when data is available to ensure that old data is never left behind The advantage of this method is that if the MAV bit is not set the controller can not read old data therefore data can only be read after it has been requested Example In Readout display with the output buffer empty and the MAV bit not set config ure the ML2430A to give an SRQ on data becoming available by setting bit 4 in the Status Register Enable byte SRE SRE 16 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION SERVICE REQUEST STATUS SRQ 2 Request data from display channel 1 by sending O 1 The SRQ will be set with the new reading which will no
195. lues that can be represented by lt NRf gt notation 1 0E9 10 005 83 4 5E2 234 9901 lt String gt This notation represents a string of 7 bit ASCII characters including non print able characters that is delimited Surrounded with either single quotes or double quotes The string can include text formatting characters such as line feed space or carriage return Note that if a double quote character must be sent as part of the string then it must be followed by an additional double quote Alternatively the string can be sent using single quotes as shown in the cal_file example below Examples of data represented by lt String gt notation are ML2430A OM 6 3 QUERY COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 1 15 98 Save cal file now Save cal_ file now lt Arbitrary ASCII gt This notation represents undelimited 7 bit ASCII text The end of the text must be terminated with the line feed character OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Trans mission State EOI or both This requirement makes it necessary for lt Arbitrary ASCll gt text to be transmitted only at the end of a program or response message that is at the end of a multiple input or output statement Example of data represented by lt Arbitrary ASCII gt notation Anritsu 2410A 123456 1 0 lt 0A EOI gt The example shows a sample response from the IDN 488 2 common query In the example the instrument identifies it self as an Anritsu 2410A with s
196. ment modes ML2430A OM OPTIMIZING READINGS Using the buffered Output channel ON command page 6 64 even faster meas urement speeds can be achieved By using the ON command instead of the O command x number of times extra processing is removed resulting in improved speed NOTE Using FAST mode here will not increase the speed as this mode only works when asking for one measurement at a time i e the O command only C code example Reset unit and ask for 200 buffered readings n channel 1 Send 0 13 RST ON 1 200 15L NLend use a large buffer size 4K for 200 readings Receive 0 13 buffer 4096 STOPend Settling Power Level dBm Readings Second 0 1 216 0 1 202 By changing the sensor measurement mode to Custom the ML2430A Series can be precisely configured to meet the needs of the specific application In this example the Trigger Gate Width page 6 79 has been reduced to 1 ms Channel 1 is set to Sensor A and Channel 2 is off C code example reset unit Custom measurement mode 1 ms TRGGW Auto averaging Sensor A Channel 2 off Use FAST mode Send 0 13 RST FAST ON SENMM A CUSTOM TRGGW 1ms 51L NLend Receivesetup 0 13 Fast mode therefore do not send O 1 for data just read for i 0 i lt 10 i RcvRespMsg 0 buffer S TOPend Power Level dBm Readings Second 0 240 30 240 5 23 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
197. mode ML24XX Anritsu ML2430A Series native mode HP436A Hewlett Packard HP437B Hewlett Packard HP438A Hewlett Packard ML4803 Anritsu ML4803A Series Remarks Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters This com mand is available in any emulation mode and resets the whole GPIB inter face when the emulation mode is changed When selecting GPIB emulation modes the instrument configures itself to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated For example when selecting HP 438A emulation the front panel menus pass through the pre sets for the HP 437B which presets sensor A to dBm then selects HP 438A emulation which presets sensor A to Watts FA auto average Syntax FA Remarks Automatic Filter on Allows the system to automatically select the filter used to reduce the jitter in the display Related Commands FM FH FH average hold Syntax FH 6 120 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS Remarks Hold filter sets the filter mode to Manual from Auto but retains the auto fil ter setting This function is the same as the AVGM command Related Commands FM FH FA FM Set average value Syntax FM lt val gt EN val Oto9 Remarks Sets the filter length for the averaging of sensor data For HP 438A emula tion the filter length is defined as the number 2 to the power of lt val gt For example the command FM5EN would be 2 or 32 Related Commands FH FA GT Set gr
198. n the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned TRGLVL Set trigger level TRIGGER Syntax TRGLVL lt c gt lt val gt c 1 2o0r1 amp 2 val 30 to 20 dBm ML2430A OM 6 79 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 50 Remarks f the Trigger source is set to INTA or INTB internal A or B the system triggers on a rising or falling power level edge Use this command to set the level the channel must rise above or fall below before it triggers when in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data Query TRGLVL lt c gt Returned String TRGLVL lt c gt lt val gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the link triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned TRGMODE Change trigger mode TRIGGER Syntax TRGMODE lt mode gt mode IND COMB Remarks Changes the trigger operating mode between INDividual channel trigger setups and COMBined trigger set ups Individual set up is when the trigger conditions for each channel are setup separately The combined setup al lows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions lf a channel is OFF or se
199. n the table below See the next page for measured data output examples Output Code Contents Function V Measured data valid STATUS D Data range over U Underrange dBm and dBr O Overrange Z Zero adjustment WATT Watt MODE dBm dBm dBr dBr Yo VSWR VSWR dB50 dBu 50 Q system dB75 dBu 75 Q system VL50 Volt 50 Q system VL75 Volt 75 Q system HOLD RANGE MRG1 highest sensitivity 1 MRG2 2 MRG3 3 MRG4 4 MRG5 lowest sensitivity 5 ML2430A OM 6 91 ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS Output Code ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ARG4 ARG5 AVEO AVE9 AVE1 AVE2 AVE3 AVE4 Space 5 1 GPIB OPERATION Contents Function AUTO RANGE highest sensitivity 1 2 3 4 lowest sensitivity 5 OFF AVERAGE HOLD 1 1 second interval 2 2 second interval 3 5 second interval 4 10 second interval SIGN Numeric data 5 characters x DATA 4 exponent value NOTE When the ODT OMR and OPW data output commands are received si multaneously only the command which is received last is valid Examples dBm Mode 1 2 10 y Jalsjmjafrfe 2jajvjejo Watt Mode 1 5 10 VIw a TIT A RIS 2 a Figure 6 6 Examples dBm Mode and Watt Mode 6 92 vfefo lt CR gt lt LF gt MEASURED DATA REPRESENTS 10 00 dBm 15 20 lt CR gt lt LF gt MEASURED DATA REPRESENTS 100 0 nw ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS As shown in the examples above the dBm data is output in fixed rotation while the WATT data is
200. nals and can be used to verify signal repetition intervals ML2430A OM OPERATION SYSTEM MENU 4 7 SYSTEM MENU The System menus control the operating modes display visibility sound rear panel functions and battery state of the ML2430A Series Power Meter Note that the soft keys will appear differently depending upon the operation mode selected with the Setup soft key below NOTE When editing an entry in a menu pressing the CLR key clears the digits If in a menu screen pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level Setup This menu selects the operation mode allows system setups to be saved or re called and provides two options to reset the system parameters to the default setup MODE Select between Readout Power vs Time Source Sweep and Pro NOTE OPMD file operation modes If only Readout is available check the Sys tem Rear Panel GPIB Mode setting This setting must be ML24XX When using the for Profile Power vs Time and Source Sweep modes to be ML2430A Series available Power Meter with an MA2499A or MA2499B SAVE Save the current instrument setup in one of 10 memory locations Sensor Adapter only ad Readout and Power vs ees Time modes are al SYSLNM lowed RECALL Recall a saved instrument setup from one of 10 memory locations RCL SYSLD SYSRD SYSLNM LINK There are two trigger conditions saved one for Profile mode and LINK one for Readout mode Normally Profile mode trigger conditions ML
201. native commands are presented by Functional Group in Appendix B GPIB Quick Reference The Functional Groups are Commands in this group are used to configure the rear panel BNC inputs and outputs The CALIBRATION group commands are used for the 0 0 dBm reference calibra tion and zeroing of the power sensors The CHANNEL command group controls the configuration of the two channels When both channels are activated Channel 1 appears at the top of the display and Channel 2 at the bottom If one channel is turned off the remaining channel appears in the center of the screen Commands in this function group are used to place data on the GPIB to be read by the controller These commands control characteristics of the display including the peakmeter reading display and contrast adjustments This group contains the GPIB 488 2 mandatory commands Refer to the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standards documents for further information The commands in this group control the GPIB Address GPIB command set emu lation mode ML24XXA ML4803A or HP Emulation and other parameters Commands in this group are used to configure GPIB triggering and setup the GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET and TR commands TRO TR1 TR2 TR3 Note that these commands are exclusive to GPIB and do not have equivalent front panel operations The PROFILE SETUP function group commands change how the profile is dis played on the screen Note that the Display Trigger configurati
202. nd the system will perform a TR2 type trigger command Related Commands TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GTARM Set profile trigger arming TRIGGER Syntax GTARM lt state gt state ON or OFF 6 46 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks Sets the profile trigger arming ON or OFF If set to ON the system first checks to see if the BNC sweep blanking input is TRUE before it starts to trigger If set to OFF the system triggers on whatever trigger source it has been set up for Query GTARM Returned String GTARM lt state gt GTDLY Set profile trigger sample delay TRIGGER Syntax GTDLY lt val gt units val 0 0 to 1 0 seconds Remarks Sets the time delay after the display trigger delay to when the system starts to take readings and displaying them This point is represented by the left most cursor NOTE Changing the left most cursor or trigger delay time updates either the cursor or the delay time value Query GTDLY Returned String GTDLY lt val gt GTGW Set profile trigger gate width TRIGGER Syntax GTGW lt val gt units val 100ns to 7 0 seconds Remarks Sets the time the system uses to perform whatever calculations are set up The time interval is represented by the space between the left most cursor and the right most cursor Changing either cursor or the Gate width value will update both the cursors and the gate width value The default gate width value is 2
203. nds mnemonics 6 12 CLS ESE COMMANDS used to program the Model ML2430A Series Power Meter in ML24XXA native mode The emulation mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM more more Rear panel GPIB MODE menu see Chapter 4 Operation or through the GPIB command EMUL page 6 35 All ML24XXA native GPIB commands that use parameters must have a space between the command header and the first parameter and all subsequent pa rameters must be separated by a comma Multiple commands may be sent on the same line but must be separated by a semicolon The format for ML24XXA native GPIB commands is lt command header gt lt space gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Transmission State EOI or both Clear GPIB status bytes GPIB 488 2 Syntax CLS Remarks This command performs a status data structure clear command The event status register and the status register are cleared except for the MAV bit CLS does not clear the output buffer Event Status byte Enable GPIB 488 2 Syntax ESE lt val gt val 8 bit mask Remarks Sets the Standard Event Status Enable Register bits see Figure 6 2 Bit 7 Power ON when there has been a transition from a power OFF state to a power ON state Bit 5 Command Error This bit is set when an incorrect GPIB code is sent to the power meter Bit
204. ne at the end of all updates to a particular table EX Exit cal factor table mode Syntax EX Remarks Used on the ML2430A to force a save of the cal factor table to the sensor if the data has changed 6 106 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS FA Auto average Syntax FA Remarks Automatic Filter on Allows the system to automatically select the filter used to reduce the jitter in the display Related Commands FM FH FH average hold Syntax FH Remarks Hold filter sets the filter mode to Manual from Auto but retains the auto fil ter setting This function is the same as the AVGM command Related Commands FM FH FA FM Set average value Syntax FM lt val gt EN val 1to512 Remarks Sets the filter length for the averaging of sensor data For HP 437B emula tion the command accepts 1 to 512 in 2 to the power steps For example 1 2 4 8 16 256 512 Related Commands FH FA FR Frequency of the input signal Syntax FR lt val gt lt units gt val units GZ GHz MZ MHz KZ KHz HZ Hz EN Hz Remarks Sets the frequency of the input signal so that the correct cal factor is used ML2430A OM 6 107 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Example To set the frequency of the input signal to 300 MHz FR300MZ GT Set group trigger Syntax GT lt mode gt mode O 4 2 Remarks O Ignore Group Execute Trigger GET command 1 Trigger immediate response to
205. nected modem As at power on if this command is executed with a PC connected directly to the power meter then a string of modem commands will be seen by the PC AUTO Sets up the power meter to autodial if there is a LIMITS test failure sensor RANGE error or the instrument POWER is cycled LIMITS MODLIM If this is set and the limits fail then the num ber specified in the phone number field will be dialed Remote communications can then continue as normal RANGE MODRNG If this is set and there is a signal channel range error then the number specified in the ohone number field will be dialed Remote communications can then continue as normal 4 31 SYSTEM MENU 4 32 OPERATION POWER MODPWR If this is set and the power cycles on the meter then the number specified in the phone number field will be dialed When a connection is established an SRQ will be sent to the host PC Remote communications can then continue as normal BNC Configures the input and output rear panel BNC connectors OBMD OBCH OBVST OBVSP OBDST OBDSP OBCH OBPL OBACM OBCH OBZL IBBLP PORT Output 1 or 2 Select the output port to configure see MODE below Input 1 Select what type of Blanking input you are providing see TTL LEVEL below on Input 1 Input 2 Selects input 2 for V GHz or External volts input You can not configure the V GHz or External volts input port here To config ure
206. nection is being established through to the remote computer a sequence of status messages will be reported by the modem to the computer ending with a final message of CONNECT n r There might be additional information after CONNECT but before the line termi nation characters 7 After connection has been established the power meter will send an SRQ to the remote computer The SRQ message is GAN To determine what has caused the SRQ the status register in the power meter must be read The status register in the meter is an 8 bit register There are two ways to do this ML2430A OM 5 9 PROFILE OPERATION MODE PROCEDURES a Read the status register using the equivalent of a GPIB serial poll Send the message ISPL Note There is NO terminator to this message The power meter will respond Px n x is the ASCII character determined by the value in the meter status register x B gives a status register value of 01000010 binary Comparing this with the status byte description in Section 6 7 of the manual will show that the SRQ and limits error bits are both set b Alternatively the status register can be read directly using the command STB Via This will respond Ry n y can be up to 3 digits and is the decimal representation of the status register y 66 gives a status register value of 01000010 binary Comparing this with the status byte description in section 6 7 of the manual will show that the SRQ and lim
207. ng the state of charge When the remaining capacity reaches less than 10 the icon will flash indicating that charging will soon be required When running from battery power an estimate of typical use running time remaining can be viewed using the System menu see Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Note that due to power consumption con siderations GPIB and serial remote operation are not available when the power meter is running from the battery The AUTO POWER OFF feature is also available through the System menu and can be used to automatically switch the unit to standby after a speci fied period of inactivity to save battery power The timer can be set for 10 to 240 minutes and any key press will restart the timer This same feature will auto matically switch the unit to standby when the battery is fully discharged in order to minimize the risk of over discharge NOTE The ML2430A Series Power Meter uses a high capacity Ni MH battery option ML2400A 11 Over discharge can result in a permanent loss of battery capacity of as much as 20 If the unit is to be stored for an extended period longer than one week remove the optional battery pack so as to preclude over discharge For optimum battery life store the battery pack at 20 to 50 C 4 to 122 F for short periods and 20 to 35 C 4 to 95 F for long term storage The ML2430A Series Power Meter will operate from AC or DC main power with this battery
208. nsor Zeroing a power sensor compensates for noise and thermal EMF of the device under test It is recommended prior to taking important power readings in the bottom 20 dB of a power sensor s dynamic range In dual sensor systems with both sensors connected sensor A or B must be selected ML2430A OM OPERATION RF ON OFF RFCAL Ext V VZERO ML2430A OM CAL ZERO MENU Turns the RF calibrator ON or OFF Zeros the rear panel multi purpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz con nection Analog Input This will calibrate the units to read zero volts on this BNC During this operation the connector should either not be connected to anything or should be connected to a O Volt source The rear panel voltage can be viewed by selecting CHANNEL INPUT VOLTS al though this does not have to be selected in order for the function to operate This calibration is non volatile and does not normally need to be performed In the case of offsets being introduced by the user s setup it is possible to leave the BNC cable connected to zero out system offsets however the offset zero range is limited to approximately 100 mV 4 35 Chapter 5 Procedures 5 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter presents some common procedures for use with the ML2430A Series Power Meter These procedures refer to the ML2430A Series front and rear panel connectors and front panel keys and menus as explained in Chapter 3 Connections and Chapter 4 Front Panel Op era
209. nsor Auto Zero loop enabled not range 1 under range U 85 Power Sensor Auto Zero loop enabled over range V 86 RANGE most sensitive 1 73 2 J 74 3 K Lo 4 L 76 least sensitive 5 M I MODE Watt A 65 dB Rel B 66 dB Ref C 67 dBm D 68 SIGN OF MEASURED VALUE space SP 32 minus 45 MEASURED VALUE DIGITS 0 0 48 1 1 49 2 2 50 3 3 51 4 4 52 5 5 53 6 6 54 7 7 59 8 8 56 9 9 97 ML2430A OM 6 99 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 14 HP 4378 EMULATION COMMANDS This section provides an alphabetical listing of the commands mnemon ics used to program the Model ML2430A Series Power Meter when in HP 437B Emulation mode The emulation mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM Rear Panel GPIB MODE menu see Chapter 4 Opera tion or through the GPIB command EMUL page 6 105 HP Emulation commands must not have a space between the command header and the parameter or commas between the parameters The format for HP Emulation commands is lt command header gt lt parameter 1 gt lt parameter n gt The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed charac ter OAh decimal 10 or a GPIB End of Transmission State EOI or both CLS Clear GPIB status bytes Syntax ad Co Remarks This command performs a status structure clear command The event status register and the status register are cleared except for the MAV bit ESE Set the Event Status register enable mask Syntax val
210. nsors used in both channel configurations do not include a sensor set to CUSTOM measurement mode the COMBined trigger mode is not allowed and sending the GPIB command TRGMODE COMB will produce an execution error Query TRGMODE Returned String TRGMODE lt mode gt TRGSRC Set trigger source TRIGGER Syntax TRGSRC lt c gt lt source gt c 1 20r1 amp 2 source INTA internal sensor A INTB internal sensor B EXTTTL external BNC TTL trigger input ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS MANUAL manual push button trigger CONT continuous Remarks This command is overridden by the TRO TR1 and TR2 commands when in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode If TRS is sent the trigger source reverts back to the previously selected type of triggering Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data Query TRGSRC lt c gt Returned String TRGSRC lt c gt lt source gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the link triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned TRGTYP Set Trigger type TRIGGER Syntax TRGTYP lt c gt lt type gt c 1 20r1 amp 2 type RISE FALL Remarks Sets the control type of the t
211. nt as recommended by an Anritsu Service Center Ensure that the battery is correctly connected and that the battery compartment cover is securely fastened Note that the battery is an optional component that is not used for the re tention of nonvolatile memory functions and is not required for the Power Meter to operate from either AC or DC line sources Serial and GPIB re mote operation however are not available when the power meter is running from battery power ML2430A OM INSTALLATION STORAGE AND SHIPMENT 2 8 STORAGE AND The following paragraphs describe preparing the power meter for storage and SHIPMENT shipment Preparation for Preparing the power meter for storage consists of cleaning the unit and packing it Storage with moisture absorbing desiccant crystals Whenever the unit is to be stored for an extended period longer than one week it is advisable to remove the optional battery pack Refer to Section 2 7 Battery Charging Removal and Replace ment for instructions Environmental Store the unit in a temperature controlled environment that is maintained be Requirements tween 40 and 70 C 40 to 156 F with a maximum humidity of 90 at 40 C 104 F non condensing For optimum battery life store the battery pack at 20 to 50 C 4 to 122 F for short periods and 20 to 35 C 4 to 95 F for long term storage Preparation for To provide maximum protection against damage in transit t
212. nthesized fre quency The V GHz is supplied to the rear panel input connector of the ML2430A Series The SETUP submenu has controls for cus tomizing the voltage and frequency relationship When the Cal Factor source is set to Frequency or manual enter the input signal frequency in GHz or MHz The correct sensor cali bration factor is automatically interpolated and applied to the dis played power reading Defines which calibration factor table is to be used Can be set to Factory table number 1 10 or Factory table number The maxi mum number of tables available is displayed on the screen and is never greater than 10 If a selected table has not been used before the user will be prompted to CLEAR or PRESET the table or can cel the selection If a table is CLEARED all entries are cleared ex cept for a single entry of 100 O 50 MHz If a table is PRESET the factory defined calibration factor table is copied into the speci fied user calibration factor table The CLEARED or PRESET table is saved directly to the sensor PRESET clears the ID string while CLEAR leaves the ID string as currently set The number of tables available is defined by the frequency range of the sensor and the amount of factory calibration data stored Delete Deletes the currently displayed table number 4 7 SENSOR MENU NOTE Whichever set or sets of cal factors are used the linearity and tem perature correction re mains active at all times
213. nts between the cur sors if GRAVG is turned ON Related Commands GRDRQ Query GRAVG Returned String GRAVG lt state gt Connect points on profile PROFILE SETUP Syntax state Remarks Query GRCP lt state gt ON or OFF When set to ON creates a line graph by connecting the profile data points together The default is ON GRCP ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Returned String GRCP lt state gt GRDATA Display Graph Cursor Data PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRDATA lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks Display the graph cursor data readout box GRDATA must be turned on be fore attempting to execute the GRDRQ command to send the data over the GPIB If GRDATA is not on GRDRQ will produce an execution error in the event status register ESR Related Commands GRDRQ Query GRDATA Returned String GRDATA lt state gt GRDDT Power vs Time data display time SYSTEM Syntax GRDDT lt time gt lt units gt time 1 minute to 24 hours 1440 minutes units MIN minutes HR hours Remarks Sets the time period of the x axis in minutes or hours For example either of the following statements may be used to set the time period to 2 5 hours GRDDT 2 5 HR GRDDT 150 MIN Query GRDDT Returned String GRDDT lt time gt lt units gt GRDRQ Return Graph Data readout DATA OUTPUT Syntax GRDRQ Remarks Returns the values in the graph data box GRDATA must be turned on be f
214. o NOT require a termination character 5 5 RS232 MODEM SUPPORT NOTE It is recommended that there is only one serial command in each com mand string Terminate each command with a newline character 5 10 Rs232 MODEM SUPPORT NOTE Serial interface remote operation is not avail able when the ML2430A Series Power Meter is operat ing from the internal battery 5 6 PROCEDURES Requested data is returned in the same format as with GPIB but with a preced ing R and a terminating new line character SRQs are available and are output as SRQ message S followed by a terminating new line character When the SRQ message has been received an SPL command equivalent to the GPIB serial poll can be issued The power meter will respond with the serial poll data message which is a single character preceded by P and terminated by a new line character A device clear message DCL can be sent to clear the power meter input and output message queues and terminate any GPIB or serial actions pending At power on factory reset in response to the MODINIT command and after the INIT key in the modem menu is pressed the following sequences will be output 1 ath r r 2 at amp h1 amp r2x4v1 gOf1 sO 1 eO r r There will be a delay between the two sequences These sequences will initialize an attached Hayes compatible modem This is the only type of modem supported The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be ope
215. o ground port 1 or 2 AOUT analog scaled output port 1 or 2 PASS FAIL pass fail port 1 or 2 SIGA signal output sensor A port 1 only LVLA1 Signal channel range 1 amplifier output for sensor A LVLA2 Signal channel range 2 amplifier output for sensor A LVLB1 Signal channel range 1 amplifier output for sensor B LVLB2 Signal channel range 2 amplifier output for sensor B ACMOD AC mod output port 1 only RFB RF blanking while zeroing port 2 only SIGB signal output sensor B port 2 only Remarks Changes the type of output selected for the BNC outputs Query OBMD lt port gt Returned String OBMD lt port gt lt mode gt OBPL BNC pass fail pass level BNC Syntax OBPL lt port gt lt level gt port 1or2 level HIGH TTL high is PASS LOW TTL low is PASS Remarks Selects the PASS level for the Pass fail type of output Query OBPL lt port gt Returned String OBPL lt port gt lt level gt OBVSP BNC analog output stop voltage scale BNC Syntax OBVSP lt port gt lt val gt ML2430A OM 6 59 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS port val Remarks GPIB OPERATION 1or2 5 00 to 5 00 Volts Sets up the stop value for the voltage output in analog output mode At tempting to set the start value to a voltage greater than the stop value or the stop value lower than the start value will result in an execution error Query OBVSP lt port gt Returned String OBVSP lt port gt
216. offset to be applied Off No offset applied Fixed A fixed dB offset VALUE is applied to the sensor data Table The tables are a set of frequency against dB offsets The offset value used from the table depends on the setting of the frequency correction source If the source is FREQUENCY the entered fre quency is used to calculate the offset from the table If the fre quency correction source is V GHz the frequency value calculated from the supplied ramp input is used to calculate the offset from the table If the frequency does not match any frequency in the table interpo lation is used to calculate the correct offset NOTE If the frequency is greater than the maximum frequency in the table the offset value from the maximum table fre quency is used If the frequency is less than the minimum frequency in the table the offset from the minimum table frequency is used Enter the offset value dB when Offset TYPE is set to Fixed Valid range is 99 99 to 99 99 4 11 SENSOR MENU Duty cycle Rng Hold RGH NOTE Rng Hold is not available when System Setup mode is set to Source Sweep In this mode AUTO ranging is 4 12 TABLE OFFTBL OFFTBR OFFTBU OFFVAL OPERATION Select the offset table number 1 5 when Offset TYPE is set to Ta ble When a table is selected additional soft keys become available EDIT This will bring up all of the selected offset table s entries with their associ
217. olts A 1 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Instrument Ac curacy Zero Set and Drift Noise APPENDIX A lt 0 5 lt 0 5 MA2420A lt 0 5 MA2470A Series and MA2440A Series Percent of full scale in most sensitive range measured over one hour with maximum averag ing after one hour warm up at constant temperature lt 0 5 of full scale in most sensitive range measured over a one minute interval with maximum averaging two standard deviations at constant temperature after one hour warm up typical MA2470A Series 20 pW typical 1 00 mW Power Reference Frequency Output Level VSWR Connector 50 MHz nominal 1 00 mW 1 2 year 0 9 RSS traceable to National Standards lt 1 04 Type N female SENSOR CHANNEL CONTROL Operating modes Range Hold Averaging Limit Lines Readout dual channel RF power or voltage Power vs Time single channel graphic of readout data over adjustable time interval RF power or voltage Profile single channel RF peak power graphic display for analysis of repetitive pulse or transient waveforms Source Sweep Single channel graphic display syn chronized to an RF source Current range or selectable 1 through 5 6 with Universal Power Sensor Auto averaging Moving average increases averaging at low power ranges Averaging Types Auto Manual Moving Repeat Manual Average Range 1 2 4 512 Low Level Averaging Low Medium and High
218. on commands DTRGD and GRPRD in this group do not change how the system triggers only where the graph is drawn after a trigger has occurred Refer to the TRIGGER group functions to configure the measurement triggering ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION GROUPS SENSOR SYSTEM TRIGGER ML2430A OM FUNCTIONAL The SENSOR group commands select the data acquisition controls for the se lected sensor The SYSTEM group commands control the overall functionality of the ML2430A Series Power Meter including the system operation mode cursor control display configuration sound printing battery control and status rear panel configuration graphics system security and system identity The TRIGGER group functions are used to program the triggering of measure ment data TRIGGER group commands are available in PROFILE operation mode and in READOUT mode if the SENSOR SETUP MODE submenu is set to CUSTOM In CUSTOM the channels are triggered simultaneously if the trigger conditions are set to 1 and 2 This guarantees the trigger conditions are the same and therefore the readings are valid if taken at the same time Changes to the trigger configurations can be made using these GPIB commands regardless of the power meter operating mode but will not come into play until the unit is configured to use triggers 6 11 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION 6 10 ML24XXA NATIVE This section provides an alphabetical listing of the GPIB comma
219. on the front panel whether the remote line Power Meter is operat is set or not ing from the internal battery If the GPIB box is on the screen and the system is not in a menu screen and the system is in local mode menus available and no GPIB operations are pending then pressing the CLR key clears the GPIB box off the screen 5 4 ML2430A OM PROCEDURES 5 9 SERIAL REMOTE OPERATION NOTE Serial interface remote operation is not avail able when the ML2430A Series Power Meter is operat ing from the internal battery ML2430A OM SERIAL REMOTE OPERATION The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be operated remotely through the rear panel serial connector See Chapter 3 Connectors for the location of the serial connector Whereas GPIB has restrictions on total cable length and cable length between instruments RS232 serial communication is not as limited The GPIB can also be prone to electrical interference and is not easily electrically isolated while RS232 can be isolated using optical couplers Serial interface remote oper ation can be useful if the testing is to be done in the presence of high electrical fields and like environments While most standard serial cables will suffice a 9 pin null modem serial interface cable is available from Anritsu as an optional accessory part number B41323 Note that the hardware handshake CTS and RTS lines are used to control the flow of data in and out of the power meter
220. onnector on the UUT O the ML2430A Series Calibrator connector a disconnected from any signal source When a new sensor is attached the message SENSOR x NOT ZEROED where x A or B as appropriate is displayed If a sensor is removed and then reconnected the message is not displayed The sensor can either be zeroed or zeroed and calibrated in the same operation ML2430A OM 5 1 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURES To zero the sensor without calibration press the Cal Zero front panel key and the Zero soft key then select the appropriate sensor ML2430A Cal Zero Zero Sensor A Sensor B Figure 5 1 Sensor Zeroing Key Sequence Note that if only one sensor is connected the A B selection is not dis played and the zeroing process begins immediately The message changes to SENSOR x ZERO On successful comple tion of the zeroing operation the buzzer sounds Sensor calibration should be performed next If the sensor fails the zeroing operation the message SENSOR x ZERO fail nxnnn is displayed The hexadecimal error code nxnnn indicates the detailed reason for the failure which is usually due to excessive RF noise The sensors can also be zeroed using the GPIB ZERO command see Chapter 6 GPIB Operation 5 4 SENSOR CALIBRATION Referencing power sensors to the ML2430A Series 50 MHz 0 0 dBm cali brator is recommended Sensors should be zeroed before being cali brated either as a separate operation Section 5 3 o
221. operation mode Readout O command response Pwr vs Time O command response Profile OGBD command response binary graph data for example Source Sweep OGBD command response binary graph data for example After a TR1 command the instrument returns to either TRO trigger hold or TRS trigger free run mode depending on what it was previously set to Related Commands TRO TR2 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 TR2 Trigger with a settling delay GPIB TRIGGER Syntax TR2 lt c gt c 1or2 Remarks Triggers a fully ranged and settled reading which is returned on the GPIB Bus If averaging is set to ON the average buffer will be cleared and filled before the result is returned The returned reading differs depending on the operation mode Readout O command response Pwr vs Time O command response Profile OGBD command response binary graph data for example Source Sweep OGBD command response binary graph data for example NOTE TR2 in Profile and Source Sweep mode is not supported and will revert to a TR1 type measurement If the channel is set to External Volts TR2 is not supported as there is no averaging and settling and will revert to a TR1 type measurement ML2430A OM 6 77 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Related Commands TRS Trigger free run Syntax Remarks Related Commands TRGARM Trigger arming After a TR2 command the instrum
222. or each end of each sensor range and the zero value and are kept in non volatile memory until the Range Calibrator is connected and a calibration run again Response format RCD lt ws gt lt sensor gt lt state gt lt zero value gt lt range 1 upper gt lt range 1 lt state gt If state is FALSE no data follows because there are no valid results for this sensor available If state is TRUE the results for the selected sensor are displayed in the fol lowing order zero value range 1 upper range 1 lower range 2 upper range 2 lower ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS range 3 upper range 3 lower range 4 upper range 4 lower range 5 up per range 5 lower REL Relative control CHANNEL Syntax REL lt c gt lt mode gt c 1or2 mode O Turn OFF 1 Turn ON and reference 2 Turn ON use old references if not first time Remarks Turns relative ON or OFF or references the zero point REL1 and REL2 toggle between relative and absolute measurements Sending the RELx command when in dB mode will make the meter apply the last used RELATIVE value This relative value is used thereafter until it is replaced by another one in the same manner This allows the user to re fer to a previously referenced value without the meter resetting itself back to a 0 00 display Query REL lt c gt Returned String REL lt c gt lt mode gt RFCAL Turn RF reference calibrator ON or OFF CALIBRATION Syntax RFCAL lt state g
223. or output mode and CUSTOM measurement mode Figure 3 2 ML2430A Series Rear Panel ML2430A OM 3 3 3 4 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation 4 1 INTRODUCTION The ML2430A Series Power Meter is controlled from the front panel using the five main menu keys Sensor Channel Trigger System and Cal Zero This chapter explains the power on procedure and the features and functions of each of the menus Also refer to Appendix C for quick reference Menu Maps 4 2 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS The front panel controls are shown and described in Figure 4 1 The following sections provide more detailed explanations of the Menus and soft keys NOTE Where appropriate related GPIB commands are listed in brackets under the menu selection Refer to Chapter 6 GPIB Operation for in formation on using GPIB commands NOTE This manual is written for instruments fitted with software 3 00 or above ML2430A OM FRONT PANEL CONTROLS Graphic LCD with Backlight The LCD display settings are configured in the System menus The backlight can be turned on or off or time delayed as required to suit ambient conditions and battery drain The backlight is controlled through the System menus when oper ating from the internal battery Numeric Keypad Provides the means for entering numeric data in the appropriate menus as required for system configuration or calibration Power On Off Switches the power meter from STANDBY to ON or ON to STANDBY Note th
224. ore attempting to execute GRDRQ The result string is ML2430A OM 6 4 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION GRDRQ lt channel number gt lt Cursor 1 dB gt lt Cur sor 2 dB gt lt Delta power gt lt Delta time gt lt Average gt lt Delta power gt and lt Delta time gt are absolute values lt Average gt is only present when between cursor averaging is turned ON with the GRAVG command If no data is available that is a sensor is not fitted the profile is not trig gered or the Power vs Time graph has not reached to the cursor the out put for the relevant readout value is 999 output as 9 99e2 Example result strings might look like GRDRQ 1 10 000 5 000 5 1E 03 cursor average off GRDRQ 1 10 000 5 000 5 1E 03 7 5 cursor average on Related Commands GRAVG GRDATA GRFS Profile Reference line state PROFILE SETUP Syntax GRFS lt state gt state ON or OFF Remarks Turn the profile reference line ON or OFF The profile reference line is cen tered between the top and bottom of the display Query GRFS Returned String GRFS lt state gt GRMD Profile Power vs Time and Source Sweep Mode Channel PROFILE SETUP Selection Syntax GRMD lt c gt c 1or2 Remarks Selects the channel displayed on the Profile Power vs Time and Source Sweep graphs Query GRMD Returned String RMD lt c gt GRPIX Profile type PROFILE SETUP 6 42 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NA
225. orted Disable display Display enable Disable Display Y Ye O O es es O es es es es es es es es es es es es es es es es es es es es S es Restrictions None None None None None None None DISP OFF restrictions Screen and min max not updated Relative not active DISP ON None see DD Not supported Not supported None None Not supported None None None None None None None None Switch to frequency cal factor source None None None None None None None None None None On channel not sensor On channel not sensor Both high and low off as HP 437B ML2430A OM APPENDIX B ML2430A OM Mnemonic LM1 LN LP LT MZ OCO OC1 OD OFO OF1 os PCT PR RA RC RE RFO RF9 RH RLO RL1 RL2 RM RST RT RV SE SM SNO SN9 SP SRE SRE ST STB TRO TR1 TR2 TR3 TST UP 1 2 Action Supported Output display text Yes Status output Terminator HP IB SUPPORT Restrictions Both high and low on as HP 437B None Not supported Not supported None None None Supports reading output and Cal factor table output only F Factory table None None OSDOEN not supported None None None Limited to 10 stores Set screen decimal places None None None None None ML2430A ranges None Not supported None None As much as has meaning for ML2430A Set to O if not used None Not supported None None
226. ould not be considered part of the IEEE 488 1 2 status byte MSS the Status Byte STB OR ed with the Service Request Enable register SRE Unlike the ESR Command this command does not clear the register afterwards Perform the GPIB Group Execute Trigger command GPIB 488 2 Syntax TRG Remarks Performs a GET command The GTO GT1 and GT2 commands set the response to the GET or TRG commands When the ML2430 Series is triggered using this command or the 488 1 hardware trigger a trigger and output for each display channel that is not OFF gives a response in the output queue If both display channels are displayed there will be two messages in the output queue to be read out Related Commands GTO GT1 GT2 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS TST Self Test GPIB 488 2 Syntax TST Remarks Performs a self test and returns PASSED or FAILED NOTE This command will restart the sweep in Power vs Time mode Related Commands STERR ADDR Change GPIB address GPIB SETUP Syntax ADDR lt val gt val 1to 30 Remarks Once the address has been changed the ML2430A Series will no longer respond to the old address The power meter default address is 13 Query ADDR Returned String ADDR lt val gt AVG Sets up averaging for a sensor SENSOR Syntax AVG lt s gt lt mode gt lt val gt s AorB mode OFF MOV Moving RPT Repeat AUTO Automatic val ASCII string representing an in
227. oup trigger Syntax GT lt mode gt mode O 4 2 Remarks O Ignore Group Execute Trigger GET command 1 Trigger immediate response to GET command 2 Trigger with delayed response to GET command The GTn command configures what the device does when it receives the GET command For example GT1 sets the GET Group Execute Trigger to perform a TR1 type trigger Related Commands TR KB Calibration factor Syntax KB lt val gt lt terminator gt val 1 0 to 150 0 terminator PCT EN ML2430A OM 6 121 HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION LG LH LL LM 6 122 Remarks Examples Set log units Syntax Remarks Set high limit Syntax val Remarks Example Set low limit Syntax val Remarks Example The calibration factor compensates for mismatch losses and effective effi ciency over the frequency range of the power sensor KB99 9 KB99 9PCT KB99 9EN LG Changes the display to log units dBm LH lt val gt EN 99 999 to 99 999 dBm only Sets the high limit LH30 00EN LL lt val gt EN 99 999 to 99 999 dBm only Sets the low limit LL20 00EN limits check state Syntax state Remarks LM lt state gt O off or 1 on Turns limit checking on or off ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION LN OC Ol OS PR ML2430A OM Set linear units Syntax Remarks HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS L
228. ource sample delay sample gate width source continuous manual trigger arming source internal A internal B trigger arming trigger type trigger level source external TTL trigger edge std trigger mode std trigger mode continuous 1 ms 20 ms blanking off blanking off rise gt 15 dBm rise A 7 SYSTEM DEFAULTS A 8 SYSTEM setup profile TRIGGER setup source sample delay sample gate width source continuous manual trigger arming source internal A internal B trigger arming trigger type trigger level source external TTL trigger edge SYSTEM setup mode mode profile SYSTEM profile channel data hold representation data collection period display trigger delay mode power vs Time SYSTEM pwr vs Time channel data hold representation data display time mode source sweep SYSTEM source sweep channel data hold representation source sweep mode mode frequency sweep start sweep stop mode power sweep start sweep stop APPENDIX A continuous 1 ms 20 ms blanking off blanking off rise gt 15 dBm rise readout 4 normal 10 ms O ns 1 normal 1 min 4 normal frequency 10 MHz 20 GHz 10 dB 10 dB mode profile power vs time source sweep SYSTEM control scale top dB value scale bottom dB value readout link cursor hold 20 dB 50 dB on off off ML2430A OM APPENDIX A ML2430A OM
229. ower meters This command is available in any emulation mode and resets the whole GPIB interface when the emulation mode is changed When selecting GPIB emulation modes the instrument configures itself to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated For example when selecting HP 438A emulation the front panel menus pass through the presets for the HP 437B which presets sensor A to dBm then selects HP 438A emulation which presets sensor A to Watts NOTE This command requires a white space between the com mand header EMUL and the parameter lt mode gt This is an ML2430A specific command that does not conform to the HP Emulation command format defined at the begin ning of this section H Hold mode Remarks Sets both channels to trigger hold mode The power meter does not trigger until it receives an or T command If it receives an R or V command it re verts back to the trigger mode it was in before the H command was sent 6 96 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 436A EMULATION COMMANDS Trigger without settling Remarks Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB After an command the instrument returns to standby mode H Ol Identification Remarks Ask for identification of current operating mode Responds with HP436 R Free run mode Remarks Sets the ML2430A Series back into free run mode to continuously tak
230. ows a typical arming diagram ML2430A OM OPERATION TRIGGER MENU GSM BURST FROM GENERATOR BURST TRIGGER SYNC FROM GENERATOR Figure 4 3 Typical Arming Diagram 1 Connect to the rear panel digital input 2 Select Trigger Setup ARMING Blanking ON 3 Set the polarity of the blanking System menu Example power meter reading 9 16 dBm TYPE The Type selection RISE or FALL sets the trigger for a rising or TRGTYP falling edge When the trigger source is set to INTA or INTB Inter GTTYP nal A or B the power meter triggers on a power level which is rising or falling LEVEL The Level selection sets the internal trigger level When the trigger NOTE TRGLVL source is set to either INTA or INTB internal sensor A or B the GTLVL channel triggers on a power level in dBm given by the sensor Effective range is to ap This value must not take any cal factors or offsets that the meter proximately 30 dBm applies into account and is only active in DC o ranges 1 and 2 Trig 1 If Trigger Channel 1 SOURCE is set to Manual this softkey initiates a measurement for channel 1 Trig 2 If Trigger Channel 2 SOURCE is set to Manual this softkey initiates a measurement for channel 2 Trig 1 amp 2 If Trigger Channels 1 and 2 SOURCE are set to Manual this softkey triggers both channels simultaneously ML2430A OM 4 19 TRIGGER MENU PRETRIGGER INCOMING SIGNAL FROM SENSOR OPERATION Figure 4 4 shows a typical t
231. pad Refer to the following sections of this chapter for detailed in formation on using the soft keys CALIBRATOR Menu Keys When pressed the first level submenus appear on the display directly above the soft key for that menu function Refer to the following sections of this chapter for detailed information on using the menu keys OPERATION ML2430A OM OPERATION 4 3 POWER ON PROCEDURE ML2430A OM POWER ON PROCEDURE At power on the power meter performs a brief power on self test POST After the POST the instrument loads the last used configuration and dis play settings If a POST error occurs information and available options will be displayed on the screen The following tests are performed during the power on self test and also when the GPIB TST command is sent Table 4 1 Power on Self Test TEST SEQUENCE POSSIBLE STATUS Flash EPROM code checksum Pass or Fail Flash EPROM personality data checksum Pass or Fail Flash EPROM calibration data checksum Pass or Fail Volatile RAM tests Pass or Fail Non volatile RAM checksums Pass Fail WARNING Software version changed all non vol stores reset Current store failed current store reset Saved store s failed failed store status changed to not saved WARNING Secure mode clear memory all non vol stores reset Display Pass or Fail Keyboard Pass or Fail During the power on self test only failures and warnings will be displayed on t
232. power sweep mode Query SRCSPPWR Returned String SRCSPPWR lt power gt SRCSTAT Source Sweep mode status request SYSTEM Syntax SRCSTAT Remarks Requests the source sweep status and returns the following message SRCSWP lt ws gt lt mode gt lt start_power gt lt stop_power gt lt start_freq gt lt stop_f req gt SRCSTFRQ Source Sweep Start Frequency SYSTEM Syntax SRCSTFRQ lt freq value gt units freq value 10 kHz to 122 GHz Remarks Determines the start frequency when in frequency sweep mode Query SRCSTFRQ Returned String SRCSTFRQ lt frequency gt SRCSTPWR Source Sweep Start Power SYSTEM Syntax SRCSTPWR lt power value gt ML2430A OM 6 71 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS START STATUS GPIB OPERATION power value power Remarks Determines the start power level of power sweep mode Query SRCSTPWR Returned String SRCSTPWR lt power gt Initial startup self test command GPIB SETUP Syntax START Remarks This is useful for ATE control After the system has been given time to start Related Commands Status Message Syntax Remarks up this command can be used to find out what state the system is in If the self test has failed CONT can be used to get the system running This is an initial startup self test status command and will return one of the follow ing O Passed self test and running 1 Startup self test running 1 Start up self test FAILED In this stage of t
233. r in conjunction with NOTE calibration Section 5 5 To reference the sensor connect the sensor to the ML2430A Series 50 When a Universal MHz 0 0 dBm reference output connector labeled CALIBRATOR or an Power Sensor with op other 50 MHz 0 0 dBm reference tion 1 fitted is changed from T RMS mode to When the sensor is first attached the message SENSOR x NOT ZE F CW mode the user ROED where x A or B as appropriate is displayed Perform the sensor should perform a new zeroing procedure described in Section 5 3 to zero the sensor zero cal To calibrate the sensor after zeroing press the Cal Zero front panel key and the Cal O dBm soft key then select the appropriate sensor ML2430A Cal Zero 0 dBm Sensor A Sensor B Figure 5 2 Sensor Calibration Key Sequence Note that if only one sensor is connected the A B selection is not dis played and the zeroing process begins immediately On successful completion of the calibration operation the buzzer sounds If the sensor fails the calibration operation the message SENSOR x CAL 0 dBm invalid is displayed 5 2 ML2430A OM PROCEDURES 5 5 SENSOR ZERO CAL 5 6 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION ML2430A OM SENSOR ZERO CAL Any error conditions encountered during calibration for example the pres ence of extraneous noise or RF signals will result in an error message on the front panel display The sensors can also be calibrated using the GPIB CAL command see Chapter 6
234. r options and sensor accessories are avail able for use with the ML2430A Series Power Meters Power Sensors 70 to 20 dBm Model No Range MA2468A 10 MHz 6 GHz MA2469B 10 MHz 18 GHz 60 to 20 dBm nominal bw 1 2 MHz MA2472A 10 MHz 18 GHz MA2473A 10 MHz 32 GHz MA2474A 10 MHz 40 GHz MA2475A 10 MHz 50 GHz Thermal Sensors 30 to 20 dBm Model No Range MA2421A 100 KHz to 18 GHz MA2422A B 10 MHz 18 GHz MA2423A B 10 MHz 32 GHz MA2424A B 10 MHz 40 GHz MA2425A B 10 MHz 50 GHz High Accuracy Sensors 64 to 20 dBm Model No Range MA2442A 10 MHz 18 GHz MA2444A 10 MHz 40 GHz MA2445A 10 MHz 50 GHz Universal Power Sensor Model No Range MA2481A 10 MHz 6 GHz MA2480 01 Add Fast CW Sensor Options MA2400A 10 Extra Cal Factor Freq 0 01 40 GHz ML2430A OM 1 3 SENSORS NOTE The use of sensor ca bles greater than 10 meters in length is not recommended when measuring pulses of less than 10 us 1 4 Sensor Accessories ML2400A 20 ML2400A 21 ML2400A 22 ML2400A 23 ML2400A 24 ML2400A 25 ML2400A 26 ML2400A 27 ML2400A 29 ML2400A 30 ML2400A 33 MA2499B MA2497A 1N75C 1N50C 1K50A 1K50B 42N75 20 42N50 20 42N50 30 42KC 20 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 5m Sensor Cable 0 3m Sensor Cable 3m Sensor Cable 5m Sensor Cable 10m Sensor Cable 30m Sensor Cable 50m Sensor Cable 100m Sensor Cable Bulkhead Adapter Extra Operation Manual ML2437 38A Pr
235. rated remotely through a modem connected to the rear panel serial connector See Chapter 3 Connectors for the location of the serial connector using the GPIB RS232 command set The menu selection System Rear panel RS232 MODE must be set to EXT COMMS To initiate communications with the power meter from a remote computer com munications must be established between the two modems Once this is done the modems become transparent to the user and GPIB RS232 commands can be entered as if the power meter is connected directly to the remote computer The power meter can also be configured to automatically dial a specified number if one or more predetermined error conditions are met When an instrument state change occurs that initiates an AUTODIAL sequence the power meter will send an escape sequence to the modem It will then output commands to determine if there is a modem connected and if there is whether it is connected through to another modem If a modem is found and it is not connected to a remote modem the power meter will dial the number speci fied in the phone number field When the connection to the remote computer is established the power meter will send the serial SRQ message When an autodial sequence is initiated different sets of characters will be seen on the remote PC depending on what is connected to the power meter serial port ML2430A OM PROCEDURES GPIB RS232 Modem Commands ML2430A OM Connected
236. readout display and channel 2 at the bottom If a channel input configuration is turned off the remaining channel appears in the center of the screen NOTE When editing an entry in a menu pressing the CLR key clears the digits If in a menu screen pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level The Channel submenus are as follows The setup menu allows the user to set up the configuration of the display chan nels The setup parameters are CHANNEL Selects the channel to be configured Toggles between Channel 1 and Channel 2 INPUT This is the sensor combination of sensors or rear panel BNC input CHCFG that is used to calculate the measured and processed value for this channel For the Model ML2437A single input power meter the available options are A External Volts or OFF For the ML2438A dual input power meter the options are A B A B B A A B B A External Volts or OFF UNITS The units can be dB m Watts dBuV or dBmV If the External Volts CHUNIT input is selected the units are fixed to Volts RESO The number of decimal places in which the results are displayed in LUTION Readout mode with certain limitations If the units selected are in CHRES Watts or Volts and the value goes down to pW or LV the number of decimal places is forced to zero If the number to be displayed is too large for the number of decimal places selected the decimal places displayed will be reduced MIN MAX This selec
237. requency manual 50 MHz 100 100 50 MHz 10 MHz 20 GHz O volts 10 volts percent SYSTEM setup readout or power vs time mode mode HP 437B amp HP 438A mode moving mode repeat averaging number auto low level averaging SYSTEM setup profile graph averaging state between cursor average SENSOR offset offset type offset type HP 437B offset type HP 438A offset type fixed offset value offset type table table number auto auto 64 low off on off off fixed O dB ML2430A OM APPENDIX A ML2430A OM frequencies offset values SENSOR duty cycle duty cycle state duty cycle CHANNEL setup input config chan 1 A chan 2 off input config HP 437B amp HP 438A meas units meas units HP 437B meas units HP 438A display resolution tracking min max display CHANNEL relative CHANNEL limits high limit high limit HP 437B high limit HP 438A low limit low limit HP 437B low limit HP 438A high limit enabled low limit enabled fail indicator hold fail beep control TRIGGER SYSTEM DEFAULTS O Hz 0 dB off 100 chan 1 A chan 2 off dBm dBm watts 2 decimal places off off 0 dBm 90 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 90 dBm 0 dBm off off off off SYSTEM setup readout or power vs time SENSOR meas mode default SENSOR meas mode mod average SENSOR meas mode custom TRIGGER setup s
238. rigger timing diagram Note that the display trigger delay is only present when in Profile operation mode and helps in setting the window position along the signal CURSOR CURSOR 1 2 GATE WIDTH DELAY DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY PROFILE MODE TRIGGER POINT DATA COLLECTION TIME PROFILE MODE Figure 4 4 Sample Trigger in Graphic Mode NOTE External trigger is only effective at 800 KHz or lower 4 20 The Data Collection Time collection period is only present when in Pro file operation mode System Profile PERIOD and is the period of time displayed on the profile graph The Gate Width is the section of the signal in which the measurements are performed In Profile mode this is the time between Cursor 1 and Cur sor 2 and is used to provide the Between Cursor Average measurement Display Trigger Delay System Profile DELAY is the delay after the trigger point The Pretrigger System Graphics PRE TRG is only used in the Pro file mode and shows a percentage of the data collection time as Pretrig ger information If the display trigger delay is less than the pretrigger delay period there will be no Pretrigger information as it will be before the trig ger point itself Setting the display trigger delay to the length of the data pulse causes a trigger on the first pulse but displays the second pulse with valid pretrig ger information This is the best method for repetitive sig
239. rigger used when the source is set to either INTA or INTB internal A or B in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data Query TRGTYP lt c gt Returned String TRGTYP lt c gt lt type gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the link triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned TRGXTTL Set external trigger edge type TRIGGER Syntax TRGXTTL lt c gt lt type gt c 1 2o0r1 amp 2 ML2430A OM 6 91 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION type RISE FALL Remarks Sets the control type of the external trigger input used when the trigger source is set to EXTTTL in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data If external trigger is used on both trigger channels 1 and 2 the same TTL edge MUST be used on both channels Query TRGXTTL lt c gt Returned String TRGXTTL lt c gt lt type gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the lin
240. ror On off LIMIT fail beep on channel 1 On off LIMIT fail beep on channel 2 On off CURSOR out of screen beep On off SYSTEM MENU APPENDIX C Battery BAUTS AUTO power off if smart battery detected On off BAUTT Auto power off TIME if smart battery detected 10 to 240 minutes STATUS if smart battery detected CHARGE Rear Panel GPIB setup menu ADDR GPIB ADDRESS 1 to 30 EMUL EmulationMODE ML24xx HP436A HP437B HP438A ML4803 BUFF output BUFFERing only in ML24xx mode ON OFF RS232 setup menu RSMODE RS232 MODE EXT COMMS SOURCE IF RSBAUD RS232 BAUD rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 MODEM setup MODPH Phone Up to 40 characters MODRED Redial COUNT 0 to 10 MODDEL Redial DELAY 1 to 10 MODINIT INITialize modem AUTODIAL setup MODLIM LIMITS fail True false MODRNG RANGE fail True false C 12 ML2430A OM APPENDIX C MODPWR OBMD OBCH OBVST OBVSP OBDST OBDSP OBCH OBPL OBACM ML2430A OM BNC setup SYSTEM MENU POWER on off True false PORT Output 1 output 2 input 1 input 2 Operating MODE only if port output 1 or output 2 o p 1 off analog out pass fail sig chan A leveling A1 leveling A2 AC Mod output o p 2 off analog out RF blanking pass fail sig chan B leveling B1 leveling B2 if mode ANALOG OUT and port output 1 or output 2 CHANNEL 1 2 Voltage START 5V to 5V Voltage STO
241. s MFM lt mem gt lt gt lt value gt Memory location 1 to 30 Frequency value in MHz Set the frequency value at memory store address lt mem gt to lt value gt MHz ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML4803A EMULATION COMMANDS Set the offset value at the specified memory location in dBm Syntax MOF lt mem gt lt j gt lt value gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 value Offset value in dBm Remarks Set the offset value at memory store address lt mem gt to lt value gt dBm MRF Set the reference value at the specified memory location in dBm Syntax MRF lt mem gt lt j gt lt value gt mem Memory location 1 to 30 value Reference value in dBm Remarks Set the reference value at memory store address lt mem gt to lt value gt dBm ODT Output the current calibration factor offset value and refer ence level Remarks These are output as three separate messages in the output buffer as shown below CAL factor 18 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt OFFSET value 18 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt REFERENCE level 19 ASCII characters lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 5 10 15 CAL dB lt CR gt lt LF gt OFFSET dB lt CR gt lt LF gt REFERENCE dBm lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 CHARACTER DATA Figure 6 3 ODT Data Output Format NOTE When the ODT OMR and OPW data output commands are received simultaneously only the command which is received last is valid ML2430A OM 6 59 ML4803A EMULATION COMMAN
242. s TRS Trigger free run Syntax Remarks Related Commands ZE Zero sensors Syntax Remarks ML2430A OM HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB After a TR1 command the instrument returns to TRO standby mode TRO TR2 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 Trigger with a settling delay TRA Triggers a new series of readings enough to update the internal digital fil ter for a noise free reading at the current power level The value is then re turned on the GPIB and returns to TRO standby mode TRO TR1 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 TR3 Sets the ML2430A Series back into free run mode on both channels TRO TR1 TR2 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 ZE Zero all connected sensors The ML2430 when emulating the HP 438 may take longer to Zero a sensor than the HP 438 itself When performing a zero the status byte should be used to identify when ZEROing is com plete 6 127 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES GPIB OPERATION 6 16 PROGRAMMING 6 128 EXAMPLES The following programming examples are provided as a general guideline on how to program the ML2430A Series Power Meters using GPIB commands All exam ples are written in Visual Basic or C language The GPIB specific calls are for the National Instruments GPIB DLL Refer to the I
243. s prepared this manual for use by ANRITSU Company personnel and customers as a guide for the proper installation operation and maintenance of ANRITSU Company equipment and computer programs The drawings specifications and information contained herein are the property of ANRITSU Company and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings specifications and information is prohibited they shall not be reproduced copied or used in whole or in part as the basis for manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior written consent of ANRITSU Company Safety Symbols To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunc tion ANRITSU Company uses the following symbols to indicate safety related information For your own safety please read this information care fully BEFORE operating the equipment Symbols used in manuals DANGER Indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly WARNING Indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly CAUTION Indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light to severe injury or loss related to equipment malfunction if proper precau tions are not taken Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manuals Some or all of the following five symbols may or may not be used on all ANRITSU equipment In addition there may be
244. s the number of bytes which make up the string after the comma For example OFFTBR 41600 lt data gt 4 number of character to read next for the data length 1600 One thousand and six hundred bytes of data to read in represent ing 200 elements placed one after the other without commas Each lt ele ment gt is made up of 8 bytes the first four bytes are the Frequency and the second four bytes are the corresponding dB value for the Frequency For example lt data_element1 gt lt data_element2 gt lt data_element3 gt is equal to lt freqi gt lt dB1 gt lt freq2 gt lt dB2 gt lt freq3 gt lt dB3 gt is equal to lt 4bytes1 gt lt 4bytes1 gt lt 4bytes2 gt lt 4bytes2 gt lt 4bytes3 gt lt 4bytes3 gt The 4 byte binary values are 4 bytes single precision floating point binary data The C programming example Binary output decoding on page 6 133 shows how to extract the binary data OFFTBU Updates an offset table SENSOR Syntax OFFTBU lt val gt lt bytes gt lt binary data gt val 1to5 bytes number of bytes in the binary data string binary_ data frequency and dB offset Remarks This command updates the offset table specified by lt val gt lt bytes gt is the number of bytes in the binary_data string and lt binary_data gt is a string which represents the frequency and the dB offset to apply in the format of lt elementi gt lt element2 gt lt elementn gt where lt elementn gt has four bytes to represent t
245. se ee ee 1 3 3 2 cable 66 6668 65465 Sau Ea 1 3 3 2 connector 2 50 55884 3 2 group commands 6 11 handling 2 1 high accuracy 2 eee ee ee 1 3 ODUONS seman asepte ee Geawe eas 1 3 ANGO 62 bas bet tan een ee eee oS 1 3 thermal sumo we ee 1 3 4 5 5 14 serial CODI eRe RE AG Pe Se ee 1 2 connector ose seis Bae de 3 3 5 5 5 6 parameters 4 30 5 5 6 68 remote operation 2 2 2 9 3 3 5 5 serialpoll 6 7 6 16 6 38 6 103 service center 6 5840 a 2 1 2 10 Service Request Status SRQ 6 9 Settle au bee he aew Ga ee ERS Bee SEA 4 5 SETUP besosss sas bee oe ee RE 4 8 ML2430A OM shipment 228 42 a26 etd DE Ema 2 10 2 11 SOUNA s 6644444 une88 48 R9 56 25 2 4 27 source 1 a a a a 4 6 4 16 Source sweep 4 22 5 17 5 18 specifications aoao aoa a a a a a a a A 1 CA IEEE 6 85 SID es aaa a A a S 4 2 STATUS 2 2 oo ee a 4 28 status byte 6 7 6 9 6 85 6 101 6 104 storage 2 2 ee eee 2 2 2 10 2 11 SWAP ss send Be we ee de 4 24 5 12 SUD an ee eeeae O o eS 2 6 1 SYSTEM serra eae eee 6 11 T TABLE ss estas eRe eee ee CE Da E 4 11 TEXT gs eee eee PARES LESS 4 27 TIME 6 62 2b peer ee eke eee wees 8 4 28 Tracking 2 45 ee 62h o oe eee oe oe 4 12 4 33 trigger 4 5 4 15 4 33 5 11 6 11 TULL eee ee eet hte ee eee EE SE 5 16 TY
246. sequence Sensor Cal Factor EDIT to get to the table edit menu Use the TABLE key to select the table then the EDIT key to edit that table Press the INSERT key to enter frequency and cal factor data pairs For example in order to enter the frequency cal factor pairs 1 GHz 100 2 GHz O 101 3 GHz 98 and 4 GHz 98 step through the keys in the following sequence FREQ 1 GHz Entr FACTOR 100 FREQ 2 GHz Entr FACTOR 101 FREQ 3 GHz Entr FACTOR 98 FREQ 4 GHz Entr DONE The frequency cal factor pairs can be entered in any order Each time a new fre quency is entered a new data pair is formed As the data pairs are entered they are sorted into frequency ascending order Readout Mode In Readout mode the bottom text line in the Status box indicates what type of calibration factors are being used At any time if anything other than the factory supplied cal data is applied the Status box display shows a warning sign on the Cal Factor line to show that non standard calibration is being applied For example CAL F frequency cal factors using factory defined table CAL V volts per GHz cal factors using factory defined table CAL M manual cal factor CAL F frequency cal factors employing a user defined table CAL V volts per GHz cal factors employing a user defined table This is because the application of user cal factors can completely change the calibrated response of the Sensor 5 20 ML2430A OM
247. settings apply post average low pass filter to improve visibility at high display resolution settings Fixed value high and low limits with audible rear panel TTL output and or visible Pass Fail alarm indication Failure indication can be set to latch until cleared so that a transient failure can be easily noticed ML2430A OM APPENDIX A Cursors Delta t Resolution TRIGGERING Trigger Sources Delay Range Delay Resolution Internal Trigger Range Internal Trigger Level Accu racy External Trig ger Range Manual Trigger SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Two manually adjustable cursors with power delta cur sor power between cursor power average and delta time readout display 0 5 of display period or 100 ns Internal External TTL GPIB Manual Continuous 0 01 to 1000 00 milliseconds 0 5 of display period or 100 ns 15 to 20 0 dBm MA2470A Series Sensors Selectable to 45 dBm 1 0 dB typical TTL rising or falling edge trigger BNC input Front Panel soft key SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Display Save Recall Setup Memory Secure Mode LCD Graphic display with dual channel readout mode and dual peak meters Backlight and adjustable con trast standard 10 storage registers plus RESET default settings Erases memory information upon power ON Default condition is Secure Mode OFF Rear Panel Inputs Outputs ML2430A OM A 3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Cal Factor
248. should select the way he wants to work and leave it In most cases the SINGLE default is the most useful as it provides a continuously updated readout of the min and max points within the cursor window The INFINITE setting is used when the results need to be collated over a large number of samples In order to RESET the INFINITE configuration use the CHANNEL menu NOTE In the triggered modes such as Internal A or B and Ex ternal TTL the SENSOR SETUP Range HOLD feature can still be applied to restrict dynamic range if required This feature allows the ML2430A Series Power Meter to be synchronized to an RF source using the Horizontal ramp to Analog Input output on the RF source The ML2430A Series can also optionally use a Sequential Sync to Digital Input output on the RF source To enable the Seq Sync input for RF sources that do provide this output the de fault set the System Rear Panel BNC Input Port 1 TTL LEVEL to HIGH This way the device will use both the Horizontal Ramp and Seq Sync inputs to sync to the sweep To disable the Seq Sync input for RF sources that do not provide this output set the System Rear Panel BNC Input Port 1 TTL LEVEL to LOW This way the de vice will only use the Horizontal Ramp to sync to the sweep ML2430A OM PROCEDURES Frequency Sweep Mode Power Sweep Mode Source Sweep Graph ML2430A OM SOURCE SWEEP MODE When the sensor cal factor source is set to V GHz in Source Sweep mode t
249. smission State EOI or both Disable cal factors Enable cal factors Set sensor operating range Remarks Auto range Remarks Watt Remarks Range 5 is the highest power range range 1 the lowest These are the opposite to the ML2430A native mode ranges that is HP 436 range 5 sets to ML2430A range 1 and HP 436 range 4 to ML2430A range 2 etc When the ML2430A is being used to emulate the HP 436 the ranges are reversed that is HP 436 range 1 the lowest power range is equivalent to the ML2430A range 5 and HP 436 range 5 the highest power range is equivalent to the ML2430A range 1 Refer to page 4 6 for more information on sensor ranges Sets the ML2430A Series to automatically select the correct range for the measurement Set units to Watts Turn relative mode off and do not allow relative 6 95 HP 436A EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION dB rel Remarks Set to dB units in relative mode using the present relative reference value C dB ref Remarks Set to dB units in relative mode using the present relative reference value and enable the application of the calfactor D dBm Remarks Set units to dBm EMUL Select emulation mode Syntax EMUL lt mode gt mode ML24XX HP436A Anritsu ML2430A Series native mode Hewlett Packard HP437B Hewlett Packard HP438A Hewlett Packard ML4803 Anritsu ML4803A Series Lp ai Remarks Sets the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of p
250. ssary ML2430A OM SYSTEM MENU Source IF allows the power meter to communicate with an Anritsu 68 69000 series synthesizer when the operation mode is set to Source Sweep BAUD RSBAUD Sets the serial port BAUD rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 default 19200 or 38400 The other RS232 serial parameters are fixed at 8 bits 1 stop bit and no parity MODEM This menu controls how a modem will react when the power meter attempts to connect to a remote computer It allows entry of a PHONE number redial COUNT and redial DELAY and permits IN ITialisation of a connected modem PHONE number MODPH The phone number can be up to 40 digits When the number is being dialed a dot will be inter preted as a 2 second delay in the dialing sequence a minus sign will be interpreted as wait for another dialing tone Redial COUNT MODRED If the dialed number does not con nect because it was not answered or was engaged then the power meter will try to redial the same number according to the count specified This has a minimum value of 0 maximum value of 10 and default value of 5 Redial DELAY MODDEL If the dialed number does not connect and is to be redialed this value specifies the delay in minutes be fore redialing This has a minimum value of 1 minute maximum value of 10 minutes and a default value of 5 minutes INITialize Modem MODINIT This is a single shot command to reinitialize a con
251. state ON or OFF 6 68 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION Remarks ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Normally when the system is powered on the ML2430A Series returns to the state it was in when it was powered off This includes all the offset ta bles calibration adjust values etc If Secure is set to ON non volatile memory is disabled and all stored val ues are reset to the factory defaults when the system is powered on As long as this command is ON the system will load the presets see Appen dix A Section A 3 every time it is turned ON Query SECURE Returned String SECURE lt s gt SENMM Sensor Measurement mode SENSOR Syntax SENMM lt s gt lt mode gt s AorB mode DEFAULT carrier wave MOD modulated average CUSTOM user configurable trigger setup mode Remarks Tells the sensor the type of signal it is expecting This helps the sensor to take the best measurements Query SENMM lt s gt Returned String SENMM lt s gt lt mode gt SENMO Universal Sensor Operation Mode SENSOR Syntax SENMO lt s gt lt value gt s AorB value TRMS FCW Remarks Selects between using a universal power sensor in its normal operating mode TRMS and its option 1 mode FCW FCW can only be selected if this option is fitted in the power sensor Query SENMO lt s gt Returned String SENMO lt s gt lt value gt ML2430A OM 6 69 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION SENSTL Set Sensor Settle Percentage SENSOR Syntax SENSTL lt
252. t lt val gt units ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS c 1 20r1 amp 2 val 0 0 to 1 0 seconds Remarks The time the system waits after a trigger event has happened before taking measurements when in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data Query TRGDLY lt c gt Returned String TRGDLY lt c gt lt val gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the link triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel If the channel is OFF the stored trigger state of the channel is returned TRGGW Set trigger gate width TRIGGER Syntax TRGGW lt c gt lt val gt units c 1 20r1 amp 2 val 100 ns to 7 0 seconds Remarks The length of time the system uses to collect data when in READOUT or POWER vs TIME mode The default value is 20 ms Select channel 1 2 or 1 amp 2 Selecting 1 amp 2 allows both channels to trigger together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of trig ger data Query TRGGW lt c gt Returned String TRGGW lt c gt lt val gt The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel if the channel is ON This depends on the settings of the link triggers flag and the current mode of the sensor o
253. t ESB_bit stb If sto And MAV_bit Then Read the data string out from the ML2430A Result_Code ReadML2430A Board Address Result If we did not have the ESB bit set wait for it again OPC will set this If sto And ESB bit O Then WaitSRQ Board Address ESB_bit stb End if Check if anything went wrong by asking for the ESB register Call DLLsend Board Address ESR 5 NLend ibsta iberr ibcntl amp Wait for it to return the data on the output queue WaitSRQ Board Address MAV_bit stb ReadML2430A Board Address ESB Read the ESB value Check the ESB for the OPC bit being set pending commands complete If Val ESB and 1 Then 4882SendReceive True Everything sent end if Now check if anything has gone wrong If Val ESB And CMD ERR bit Then 4882SendReceive Command_Error Elself Val ESB And EXEC_ERR_bit Then 6 131 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES GPIB OPERATION 4882SendReceive Execution_Error Elself Val ESB And DEVICE ERR bit Then 4882SendReceive Device dependent Error End If End Function 6 132 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Binary Output The following program example may be used to decode the three types of binary Message Decoding output messages The commands that reference this code example are OGBD MXGDB and MNGDB for the GRAPH_BINARY_DATA decoding OFFTBR for the OFFSET_TABLE_BINARY_DATA decoding and CFURD for the
254. t state ON or OFF Remarks Turns on or off the RF reference calibrator Query RFCAL Returned String RFCAL lt state gt RGH Range Hold Sensor SENSOR Syntax RGH lt s gt lt val gt s AorB val Oto 5 Oto 6 for universal power sensor only O AUTO ML2430A OM 6 67 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION Remarks This function is used to toggle a sensor s range hold off or on to set a spe cific range to be held or to select AUTO ranging RGH sent with only the sensor parameter will toggle the sensor between holding the present oper ating range and AUTO If RGH is sent with sensor and value parameters the sensor range mode will be set to the range value sent Query RGH lt s gt Returned String RGH lt s gt lt val gt RSBAUD RS232 Baud Rate SYSTEM Syntax RSBAUD lt val gt val 12 24 48 96 192 or 384 hundred bits per second Remarks Sets the RS232 Baud rate for the rear panel serial port Query RSBAUD Returned String RSBAUD lt val gt RSMODE RS232 Operating Mode SYSTEM Syntax RSMODE lt s gt s EXTCOM SRCSWP Remarks EXTCOM External communication GPIB commands are sent and re ceived via an RS232 connection SRCSWP Source sweep Connected to a sweeper so updates to the sweepers power of frequencies etc are automatically updated on the ML2430A Series also Query RSMODE Returned String RSMODE lt s gt SECURE Secure system state SYSTEM Syntax SECURE lt state gt
255. ta fval dB conversion bin data cval 2 cptrt bin data cval 3 cptrt bin data cval 0 cptr bin data cval 1 cptr real data2 loop bm data fval count 8 reall entries loop real2 entries loop j 6 134 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES else if decode type CAL FACTOR BINARY DATA Decode header Read length of binary data ch val 0 buffer 6 ch val 1 buffer 7 ch val 2 NULL length atoi ch val Point after the comma cptr amp buffer 9 Read the table identity count 8 for loop 0 loop lt count loop ident loop cptr length j ident count NULL Read number of entries bin data cval 0 cptr bin data cval 1 cptr bin data cval 2 0 bin data cval 3 0 table entries bin_data ival length 2 The cal factor table output is in frequency dB order for the whole table The frequencies format is 32768 0e 6LONG and the dBs are held in 1024INT format count 0 loop 0 while count lt length Frequency conversion bin data cval 0 cptr bin data cval 1 cptr bin data cval 2 cptr bin data cval 3 cptr real datal loop float bin_data lval 32768e 6 dB conversion bin_data cval 0 cptr bin_data cval 1 cptr bm data cval 2 0 bm data cval 3 0 real data loop
256. tain restrictions With care it can be used to display the pro file of signals down to typically 100 us or better 1 Select SYSTEM PROFILE The first two items in the menus have already been covered selection of channel 1 or 2 and the method of display min max The last two selections control the data collection PERIOD the time span of the win dow The default period is 10 ms and it can be adjusted down to 100 us and be low If you are still displaying the 1 kHz square wave enter a period of 3 ms The display will zoom in to show more detail of the pulses NOTE Thermal sensors have rise and fall times of lt 4 ms Do not use a thermal sensor for fast signal profiles Typical MA2470A and MA2440A Series sensors have rise times of lt 4 us Fall time is typically lt 10 us except at low power levels Consider this when looking at fast signals 2 Note that the cursors have remained at their set positions in time that is when altering the time axis the cursors stay at their set positions in terms of time NOT POSITION ON THE SCREEN This is very important when measuring specific points or peaks in a signal 3 By altering the DELAY parameter the PROFILE can be made to look at a seg ment of time long after or very close to the trigger point That is by setting the DELAY to 100 ms the PROFILE will show the 100th pulse and onwards of a 1 kHz square wave By setting to ZERO the profile will show data immediately after the trigg
257. tax BAUTT lt val gt val 10to 240 minutes Remarks Automatically turns the unit off after x minutes when operating on battery power NOTE Although GPIB is not available under battery operation the state of this parameter can be changed for later use Query BAUTT Returned String BAUT lt val gt BUFF GPIB response buffering enabled SYSTEM Syntax BUFF lt s gt s ON OFF Remarks f BUFF is ON In the ML243X native mode 488 2 GPIB operation when a request for data is made the response is put in an output buffer ready to be read by the controller If another data request is made and the previous data has not been read out of the output buffer the new data is queued af ter the original request In this mode of operation the GPIB response buff ering enable is ON and following the 488 2 specifications when ever a request for data is made the response should be read lf BUFF is OFF In this mode when ever a request for data is made ex cept by serial poll the output buffer is cleared and the only data in the output queue will be the response to the last data request made The out put buffer is cleared once a valid GPIB data request command has been recognised 6 20 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS NOTE If the buffering enabled is set to OFF and OPC is used the OPC will clear the output buffer of any previous re sponse data so only the 1 will appear CAL Cal sensor to 0 dBm referen
258. teger 1 to 512 Remarks MOVING average gives an update to the meter every sample gate nor mally 20 ms REPEAT averaging only returns a reading when the number of readings specified by lt val gt have been taken 1 512 AUTOMATIC averaging uses a MOVING type of average The display up dates at approximately 100 ms intervals however the data is available at the full rate The display is slowed down to prevent jitter and allow the user to follow the update Since AUTOMATIC averaging automatically chooses an average number with the averaging mode set internally to MOVING the USER averaging number is not used However if a value is entered in the ML2430A OM 6 17 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION same command as the one which changes to AUTO averaging it will also update the USER averaging number Example AVG A AUTO 64 This command will set the system to AUTO averaging and the USER av eraging number to 64 But the Auto Averaging measurement system does not use the USER averaging number NOTE The AVG mnemonic can be sent to just change the lt mode gt of averaging MOV REPEAT etc without sending a number but there must be a following COMMA to indi cate the lt val gt parameter is not being sent See the first ex ample below The AVG mnemonic can also be sent to just change the User Average Number lt val gt 1 to 512 without changing the averaging mode but there must be a COMMA to indi cate the lt mod
259. that allows the ESB state of the GPIB interface to be monitored All the bits in this regis ter are defined These bits are 6 5 4 3 2 renee feo Event Status Register ESR PON Power On bit This bit is set on power up of the device only URQ Not used in the ML2430A Series CMD Command error Received an illegal command EXE Execution error Could not execute a command For example a parameter is out of the allowable range or requesting graph data while in readout mode DDE Device Dependent Error The specific error can be found by using the ERRLST command QYE Query Error RQC Request Control GPIB controllers only 6 7 USING 488 2 GPIB 6 9 GPIB OPERATION OPC Operation Complete When a program message that includes the OPC com mand has been completed and the GPIB interface is idle with any responses read out of the output buffer this bit is set For example if the last command in a configuration sequence is OPC the OPC bit in the event status register will be set when that configuration list has been completed Also refer to Figure 6 2 page 6 13 IEEE 488 2 Standard Status Structures If an event causes a bit in the ESR to be set and the corresponding bit in the Event Status Enable byte ESE is set the ESB bit in the status byte will be set This can cause an SRQ see Section 6 8 if the ESB bit in the Status Register Enable byte SRE is set For example to get an SRQ on an unrecognized com mand do the fo
260. the amount of averaging regardless of the signal level however the dis play is updated only when the NUMBER of readings specified have been taken 1 512 NOTE Due to the nature of this method of operation if the power level changes between updates the display update will not reflect the true input power for one measurement only When a channel is set to a ratio e g A B or A B etc the repeat method described above only operates if all sensors are set to the REPEAT mode Select OFF LOW MEDIUM or HIGH Low Level Averaging in Power vs Time or Readout modes Sets the low level averaging window for the sensor At resolution settings of 0 01 and 0 001 dB digital readouts may flicker due to the high reading rate of the power meter Low level averaging applies a low pass filter to post average data readings to achieve a more stable front panel display without slowing down the response of the meter to larger changes in level The three windows for LOW MEDIUM and HIGH low level averaging are 0 01 0 02 and 0 05 dB For example When a LOW setting of low level averaging is applied while stepping from O dBm to 1 dBm the meter displays the final reading within 0 01 dB with no delay The final settling of 0 01 dB will settle over a short subsequent period of time leading to a sta ble high resolution readout With a HIGH setting of low level averaging the settling window is increased up to approximately 0 05 dB and the settling
261. the dB value multiplied by 1024 and held in LONG form E pe el Each long is 4 byte in length To read and transpose the values into real dB values each set of 4 bytes are read into a long variable and then cast into a float type and then divided by 1024 el count 0 loop 0 bin value long cptr Set the long pointer ML2430A OM 6 133 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES GPIB OPERATION Read and cast the data while count lt length t real datal loop float bin_ value 1024 0 count 4 reall entries loop j else if decode type OFFSET TABLE BINARY DATA Decode header Find character cptr strtok amp buffer 0 cptr strtok NULL Get the number of characters for binary length ch val 0 cptr ch_val 1 NULL count atoi amp ch_val 0 Get length of binary data for loop 0 loop lt count loop ch val loop cptr y ch val count NULL length atoi amp ch val 0 cptr Read past comma for offset tables The binary offset table is 200 sets frequency and dB These are held in single precision floating point To convert to the real values re order the bytes Je el count 0 loop 0 while count lt length Frequency conversion bin data cval 2 cptr bin data cval 3 optrtt bin_data cval 0 cptr bin_data cval 1 cptr real datal loop bin da
262. time is longer With low level averaging OFF the meter displays the final reading instantly with no further settling observed Any jitter due to noise is reflected in the displayed reading which may be inconvenient for high resolution readings In Profile and Source sweep modes the following soft keys appear STATE GRSWS Graph averaging state ON or OFF When set to ON the following additional soft keys appear A NUMBER GRSWP B NUMBER ML2438A only SRSWP Sweep averaging number 1 to 512 ML2430A OM OPERATION Offset NOTE Use Fixed or Table to compensate for a fixed attenuator on a sensor for measuring higher power levels A better method is to apply a Fixed cal factor in the User tables as this is then taken into account in the Zero Cal pro cess ML2430A OM CURSOR GRSWR SENSOR MENU RESET Sweep average reset If the graph sweep averaging state is ON this key resets the data points and restarts the sweep to sweep mode Between cursor averaging ON or OFF When ON a digital readout of the average power between the two cursors is displayed in the readout area of the PROFILE display Allows an offset in dB to be applied to sensor data for the selected sensor SENSOR TYPE OFFTYP VALUE OFFFIX OFFVAL Model ML2438A dual channel only Used to select the sensor to be configured Toggles between Channel A and Channel B for all submenu functions Selects the type of
263. tion The operator should be familiar with the front and rear panel lay outs and with the use of the keys and menus before attempting these procedures 5 2 POWER To perform a power measurement follow these steps MEASUREMENT a Connect the sensor s as described in Chapter 3 Connections a Configure the meter for the application Refer to Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for specific configuration options The simplest op eration is obtained with SENSOR SETUP MODE set to DEFAULT Power readings are continuous with the default setting a Zero the sensor s as described in Section 5 3 optional a Calibrate the sensor s as described in Section 5 4 optional O Measure power 5 3 ZEROING THE Zero the sensor before making power measurements particularly when SENSOR operating within the lower 20 dB dynamic range of the power sensor If frequent low level measurements are being made it is advisable to check the sensor zeroing often and repeat as necessary To zero the sensor connect it to the UUT Unit Under Test test port and remove RF power from the connection to a level 20 dB below the tangen tial noise floor of the power sensor For 70 to 20dB dual diode power sensors this level is less than 100 dBm It is preferable to leave the sensor connected to the UUT test port so that ground noise and thermal EMF are zeroed out of the measurement Alter nately in order of preference the sensor can be connected to O A grounded c
264. tion the GPIB response buffering gramming simple com enable is TRUE and following the 488 2 specifications the re mand sequences to sponse should be read when ever a request for data is made read data and you do not want to bother with lf BUFFER Enabled is FALSE In this mode when ever a request for decoding status or data is made except by serial poll the output buffer is cleared and keeping track of multi the only data in the output queue will be the response to the last ple results or readings data request made The output buffer is cleared once a valid GPIB data request command has been recognized RS232 Sets the serial communication parameters MODE RSMODE Selects External Communication or Source IF External Communi cation allows GPIB type commands to be sent to the power meter over the serial interface from a local computer or a remote com puter via a modem 4 30 ML2430A OM OPERATION NOTE For the power meter to communi cate with Anritsu 68 69000 series synthesizers using Source IF the synthesizer firmware must be later than the levels shown for the vari ous models below Model firmware level 680xxB 3 39 681xxB 3 44 682xxB 2 41 683xxB 2 50 680x5B 1 26 681x5B 1 32 682x5B 1 30 683x5B 1 34 690xxA 1 21 691xxA 1 26 692xxA 1 26 693xxA 1 35 690x5A 1 21 691x5A 1 24 692x5A 1 24 693x5A 1 31 Contact your nearest Anritsu Ser vice Center for a firmware upgrade if nece
265. tion turns on the Min Max Tracking for the display chan MNMXS nel selected On the top line of the data display when not in menu GMNMX mode the min and max of the channel data after combination and unit conversion calculations is displayed The left hand set of data is for display channel 1 and the right hand set for display channel 2 In Profile mode the Min Max is between cursors only as controlled by selecting SINGLE or INFINITE through the System Graphics TRACKING menu SINGLE default is the most useful as it provides a continuously updated readout of the Min Max points within the cursor window The INFINITE setting is used when the results needs to be collated over a large number of samples 4 13 CHANNEL MENU OPERATION RESET This function resets the Min Max when ON for the channel MMRST selected Rel 1 After the relative power level is set by the operator the Relative mode subtracts REL that value from the current measured power If selected when in Relative mode the relative operation for channel one is turned off Pressing the Rel 1 soft key when in Readout mode will subtract the last used relative value Hold down the key to retake this value The readout will display 0 00 dBr This relative value will be used thereafter until it is replaced by another one in the same manner This allows the user to refer to a previously referenced value without the meter resetting itself back to a 0 00 display Rel 2 Rela
266. tive mode control for Channel 2 is labeled Rel 2 REL Limits Pressing the Limits menu soft key displays the test limits for the selected channel This menu sets individual high and low pass fail limits for the two display chan nels These limits drive the PASS FAIL display flags and the PASS FAIL TTL out put if selected In Power vs Time graphic mode and Readout digital mode each fail of the limits produce a separate fail flag and fail beep if ON and also drive the rear panel BNC if enabled for each pass or fail reading In PROFILE mode each fail of the limits produce a fail beep if ON and hold the fail output if any point in a sweep fails If FAIL indicator HOLD is ON both the screen FAIL indicator and the BNC output are held in the fail state whenever the limits specified for the channel have been exceeded regardless of whether the reading subsequently goes into pass or not This state remains until FAIL indicator HOLD is turned OFF CHANNEL The limits are set for the selected display channel unit type The display channel units selected when the limit was originally set or turned on become the limit units If the display channel units are changed and the limits not altered limit checking is turned off for that channel If the display channel units are subsequently returned to the same units selected when the limit was entered or turned on limit checking is turned on again Whenever the limit units are active limit checking is
267. to a 3 pin grounded power outlet If a grounded 3 pin outlet is not available use a conversion adapter and ground the green wire or con nect the frame ground on the rear panel of the equipment to ground If power is supplied without grounding the equipment there is a risk of re ceiving a severe or fatal electric shock WARNING This equipment cannot be repaired by the operator DO NOT attempt to re move the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire and shock hazards should service this equipment There are high voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to un trained personnel In addition there is a risk of damage to precision com ponents WARNING If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired ML2430A OM DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Manufacturer s Name ANRITSU COMPANY Manufacturer s Address Anritsu Limited Rutherford Close Stevenage Hertfordshire United Kingdom declares that the product specified below Product Name Power Meter Model Number ML2437A ML2438A conforms to the requirement of EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by Council Directive 92 31 EEC amp 93 68 EEC Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by Council directive 93 68 EEC Electromagnetic Interference Emissions CISPR 11 199
268. to determine the fre quency of the swept signal based on the applied rear panel voltage Sensor data averaging The available soft keys depend upon the operating mode selected In Readout and Power vs Time modes the following soft keys appear SENSOR MODE AVG AVGM NUMBER AVG AVGM Model ML2438A dual channel only Select sensor A or B in Power vs Time or Readout modes Select OFF AUTO MOVING or REPEAT in Power vs Time or Readout modes AUTOMATIC averaging uses a MOVING type of average and in creases the amount of averaging as the noise level increases The display updates at approximately 100 ms intervals however the data is available at the full rate The display is slowed down to pre vent jitter and allow the user to follow the update MOVING average allows the user to manually select the amount of averaging regardless of the signal level The display is continually updated while averaging When selected the following soft key becomes available Sweep averaging number 1 to 512 4 9 SENSOR MENU NOTE GPIB trigger com mands automatically apply REPEAT averag ing after TR2 com mands to ensure old samples are excluded from the measurement However the user Should be aware that due to the high speed of the meter other in struments in the ATE system may not be set tled 4 10 LOW LEVEL AVGLL OPERATION REPEAT averaging also allows the user to manually select
269. tor gt lt cal factor units gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type frequency value 10kHzto 122 GHz cal factor 0 07 to 150 31 55 to 1 76 dB cal factor units PCT DB or DBM Remarks Adds an entry pair to a cal factor table This only affects the copy of the cal factor table stored in the memory of the power meter Cal factors entered with this command will be available for use by the DSP but will NOT be saved to the sensor until a save command CFUSAV is executed If the sensor is changed or power is lost before saving all changes made since the last CFUSAV will be lost The user must ensure that the maximum number of cal factor data pairs entered into a table is not exceeded Sensors with a maximum frequency of up to 40 GHz will hold 90 pairs while sensors with a maximum fre quency of 50 GHz will hold 110 pairs Related Commands CFUSAV CFUCT Clear cal factor table SENSOR Syntax CFUCT lt s gt lt table number gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type ML2430A OM 6 23 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS Remarks GPIB OPERATION Clears the cal factor table to one entry for 50 MHz at 100 but does not clear the identity of the table The cleared table is automatically saved to the sensor CFUID Cal factor table identity update SENSOR Syntax CFUID lt s gt lt table number gt lt identity gt s AorB table number 1 to number of tables
270. turns to TRO standby mode TRO TR2 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 Trigger with a settling delay Syntax TR2 6 115 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS Remarks Related Commands TRS Trigger free run Syntax Remarks Related Commands ZE Zero sensors Syntax Remarks 6 116 GPIB OPERATION Triggers a new series of readings enough to update the internal digital fil ter for a noise free reading at the current power level The value is then re turned on the GPIB and returns to TRO standby mode TRO TR1 TR3 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 IRS Sets the ML2430A Series back into free run mode on both channels TRO TR1 TR2 TRG Group Execute Trigger GET GTO GT1 GT2 ZE Zero all connected sensors The ML2430 when emulating the HP 437 may take longer to Zero a sensor than the HP 437 itself When performing a zero the status byte should be used to identify when ZEROing is com plete ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION 6 15 Hp 4384 EMULATION COMMANDS ID Q 1 AD ML2430A OM HP 438A EMULATION COMMANDS This section provides an alphabetical listing of the GPIB commands mne monics used to program the Model ML2430A Series Power Meter when in HP 438A Emulation mode The emulation mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM more more Rear panel GPIB JMODE menu see Chapter 4 Operation or through the GPIB command EMUL see page 6 120 HP
271. ulation mode Syntax mode EMUL lt mode gt ML24XX Anritsu ML2430A Series native mode HP436A Hewlett Packard HP437B Hewlett Packard 6 105 HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION HP438A Hewlett Packard ML4803 Anritsu ML4803A Series Remarks Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters This com mand is available in any emulation mode and resets the whole GPIB inter face when the emulation mode is changed When selecting GPIB emulation modes the instrument configures itself to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated For example when selecting HP 438A emulation the front panel menus pass through the pre sets for the HP 437B which presets sensor A to dBm then selects HP 438A emulation which presets sensor A to Watts EN Enter command Syntax EN ET Enter data for a cal factor table Syntax ET lt table number gt lt freq value gt lt cal factor gt lt terminator gt ta ble numbe 0 to 9 F for factory table allowed when using to read a table 2 freq value cal factor entry frequency value cal factor cal factor value in percentage terminator EN to terminate and entry EX to terminate table entries Remarks Since the ML2430A stores the cal factor table information in the sensor this data must be saved to the sensor by using the EX command or an additional command SV or the data could be lost The saving of the cal factor table data to the sensor can be do
272. value lt number_of_bytes gt number of bytes of data contained in rest of the string lt data_byte_n gt four of these values makes up the long integer ML2430A OM 6 63 ML24XXA NATIVE COMMANDS GPIB OPERATION For example FF FF D1 64 11932 As it is based on 1024 per dB divide by 1024 to get the dB value 11 652 OGD Output Graph Data DATA OUTPUT Syntax OGD Remarks Outputs the next complete set of graph data The format is as follows OGD lt number_of_elements gt lt element_1 gt lt element_2 gt lt ele ment_n gt lt n gt The first number in the string is the number of elements to follow and is al ways 200 for the ML2430A Series OGSD Output Valid Samples Array power vs time mode only DATA OUTPUT Syntax OGSD Remarks A power verses time chart plots the readings on a scrolling chart from left to right If GRCP connect points is on and no new data has been re ceived for a time slot the graph is plotted with the same value as the previ ous time slot but the data for that sample position is not marked as valid This command will read out an array of 1 s and O s that indicate whether the data for that time slot is valid For example 1 for valid and 0 for con necting data only Because the time between reading the data and reading the valid sample data may shift the valid samples out of sync with the graph read it is rec ommended that a HOLD ON be issued before reading the graph and sample data
273. w be in the output buffer ready to be read The data should now be read so that the MAV bit will be cleared If the data is not read or the output buffer not cleared and another re quest for data is made this data will be buffered after the previous data Getting a Reading The 488 2 standard requires that the data can only be read from the device after it has been requested Any data requested from the device is made available to be read and is stored in an output buffer As long as there is data in the output buffer to be read the Message AVailable MAV bit in the status byte is set This bit allows data to be requested and as soon as the data is available the MAV bit is set from which a service request can be produced SRQ The ML243X allows this output buffer to be turned off using the BUFF OFF com mand In this mode of operation if a number of data requests are made with out reading the data after each request only the last data requested is available Note that this does not include the serial poll request which is handled independently 6 8 SERVICE REQUEST The System Service Request Status byte available over GPIB by a serial poll is STATUS SRQ defined as follows Over Under Range bit RGH Limit Fail bit LIM Message Available in output queue MAV Event Status bit ESB RGH lf a sensor goes over or under the operating range this bit is set This bit can be used to set an SRQ by setting the same bit in the SRE re
274. way to recover from an entry error RE Set decimal point resolution Syntax RE lt number gt EN val 1 2 0r3 Remarks Set the number of decimal places displayed Example To set the display resolution to 2 decimal places RE2EN RF Set the reference cal factor value for a table Syntax RF lt table number gt lt cal factor gt table number Oto9 cal factor 50to 150 terminator Remarks Set the reference cal factor value for a table Since the ML2430A stores the cal factor table information in the sensor this data must be saved to the sensor by using the EX command or an additional command SV or the data could be lost The saving of the cal factor table data to the sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a particular table RH Range hold Syntax RH Remarks Hold the power meter in the current range The differences in sensor 6 112 ranges must be taken into account when the ML2430 is being used to em ulate the HP 437 ML2430A OM GPIB OPERATION HP 437B EMULATION COMMANDS RL Relative mode Syntax RL lt mode gt mode O 4 2 Remarks Relative mode permits any measurement result to be compared in dB or percent to a reference value Relative mode can be enabled using the cur rent power reading RL1 or the previous reference level RL2 Successive measurements are displayed relative to this reference value RLO disables relative mode RM Range hold set Syntax RM lt val gt EN val Oto5 Remarks S
275. y External Dimensions Weight Accessories Furnished ML2430A OM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Flat panel monochrome LCD graphic with backlight O to 50 C 32 to 122 F 40 to 70 C 40 to 156 F Splash and rain resistant 90 humidity non condensing AC 90 to 250 VAC 47 to 440 Hz 40 VA Maximum DC 12 to 24 VDC reverse protected to 40 Maximum input 30V Battery gt 4 hours usable with 3000 mAh battery and display backlight on Energizer model NJ1020 3000 mAh Ni MH option ML2400A 11 Complies with requirements for CE marking 1 year standard additional available Depth 15 310 38 887 cm Height 4 060 10 312 cm Width 8 540 21 691 cm standard case with feet and no handle lt 6 6 lbs lt 3 kg excluding optional battery Operation and Programming Manual Sensor Cable One per input Power cord plug that matches destination require ments SYSTEM DEFAULTS A 3 SYSTEM DEFAULTS A 6 APPENDIX A The following default parameters are loaded whenever preset is selected from the front panel or through GPIB SENSOR setup settle per reading measurement mode range hold SENSOR cal factor Source source HP 437B amp HP 438A source frequency input signal frequency source manual cal factor cal adjust input signal frequency source volts GHz start freq stop freq start voltage stop voltage units SENSOR averaging 0 10 default auto F
276. ystem is waiting for the reading to be triggered the system would wait until the reading has been pro vided before any further GPIB commands can be processed The device clear will clear the data request so further GPIB commands after the device clear has completed can be actioned Typical device library calls are 488 1 ibclr and 488 2 DevClear Device trigger GET This command triggers a GPIB device An action predefined by the setup of the device being triggered will take place On the ML2430A Series the device trigger provides a trigger of the type defined by the GTn commands previously sent and a reading put into the output buffer for each display channel that is not OFF In Profile mode the profile display for the selected channel only is output Typical device library calls are 488 1 ibtrg and 488 2 Trigger Goto local GTL This command forces the device out of remote mode and into local operation mode The local operation keys and menus are now available Typical device library calls are 488 1 ibloc and 488 2 EnableLocal Interface clear IFC This is part of the GPIB initialization and forces the board to the controller in charge Typical device library calls are 488 1 ibsic and 488 2 SendlFC Local lockout LLO Sends the local lockout to all devices The local lockout disables the LOCAL key on all the devices Typical device library calls are 488 1 ibconfig plus correct option and 488 2 SendLLO Serial poll T

Anritsu ML2430A User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents